JP7160145B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine provided with electrical wiring (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-157474 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the arrangement of the electric wiring . SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the arrangement of electrical wiring .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a plurality of configuration means having an opening configured to allow the electrical wiring to pass through at least a part of a guide path through which the electrical wiring can be guided , a plurality of protruding portions protruding from the plurality of constituent means toward the opening, wherein the electric wiring is connected to moving means configured to be movable relative to the constituent means; are arranged to be in contact with the electrical wiring, and the overhangs are spaced apart from each other.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the arrangement of the electrical wiring can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is a front view of a left direction production unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the left effect unit along line VIIa-VIIa in FIG. 6, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left effect unit along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line VIII-VIII of FIG. 6; FIG. It is a front view of a base plate. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine along the line corresponding to line XX in FIG. 9. FIG. It is a rear view of the right direction production unit. It is an exploded rear view of the right direction production unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the compound action unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating left lid portion and a rotating body; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body and a rotating right lid. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of a compound action unit of the first action unit. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the configuration of a part of the rotation unit, and (b) is a perspective view schematically showing a harness that constitutes electrical wiring. (a) is a top view of the guide member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and electrical wiring taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a), and (c) is FIG. 31(a). 31(d) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electric wiring along line XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31(a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member along line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31(d) ) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electrical wiring along the line XXXIe-XXXIe of FIG. (a) is a left side view of the compound action unit, (b) is a front view of the compound action unit, and (c) is a right side view of the compound action unit. (a) is a left side view of the compound action unit, (b) is a front view of the compound action unit, and (c) is a right side view of the compound action unit. (a) is a left side view of the compound action unit, (b) is a front view of the compound action unit, and (c) is a right side view of the compound action unit. (a) to (f) are front views of the third symbol display device and the first motion unit schematically showing the third symbol display device and the first motion unit. (a) and (b) are left side views of a detection sensor and a follower plate of the rotating right lid. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit; Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a fixed base member, a displaceable base member, drive means, transmission means and biasing means; Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the fixed base member, the displaceable base member, the drive means, the transmission means and the biasing means; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the supported means and connecting means; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the supported means and connecting means; It is an exploded front perspective view of the production means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production means. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in a plane extending horizontally through the columnar fastening portion of the support means; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; (a) to (c) are front views of a rotating arm member and a terminating gear. FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit along line LV-LV in FIG. 50; FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LVI-LVI in FIG. 50; FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 51; FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the game board in the second embodiment taken along line XX of FIG. (a) is a front view of a second operation unit in a third embodiment, and (b) is a front perspective view of a small-diameter collar. FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of the right direction production unit in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit. FIG. 21 is a front view of a second operation unit in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 . Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 in a "right-handed" manner, and a ball shot in a "left-handed" manner does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the second prize winning port 640 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 541, 731 and an electromagnetic solenoid 2086d.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIG.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. , general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, and can be fitted into the window portion 60a opened in the base plate 60 from the front side. A center frame 86 having a similar shape, a left effect unit 150 which is arranged in the lower left part of the center frame 86 and configured to be able to guide a ball to the general prize opening 63, and a variable prize winning device 65 are arranged. A right effect unit 160 having a shape that can be fitted from the front side into the small window portion 60b that opens, a ball flow down unit (not shown) configured to allow the ball discharged from the game area to flow down, etc. are assembled. and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The center frame 86, the left effect unit 150 and the right effect unit 160 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. .

The base plate 60 is made of plywood plywood laminated with plywood. The body is configured to be shieldable so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 5, the left effect unit 150 is a unit made of a light-transmitting resin material, is arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60, and has a plate-like shape with the same width as the inner rail 61. a lower plate portion 152 extending downward from the left end of the upper plate portion 151 in a plate shape having the same width as the upper plate portion 151; A facing plate portion 153 formed in a flat plate shape connected to the end portion and the rear end portion of the upper plate portion 151 and arranged to face the front surface of the base plate 60 in surface contact, and the front side of the facing plate portion 153 A bottomed semi-cylindrical ball guide member 154 that is a plurality of members fastened and fixed to the front side and opens upward, and the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 at the position below the ball guide member 154 It is mainly provided with a plurality of ridges 155 that are formed in a ridge shape extending upward from the .

No openings are formed in the base plate 60 except for openings corresponding to the general prize winning openings 63 at locations facing the left effect unit 150 . As a result, the rigidity of the base plate 60 can be used to prevent displacement (deformation) of the opposing plate portion 153 , so regardless of the thickness of the opposing plate portion 153 , the ball on the front side of the opposing plate portion 153 is It can stabilize the flow.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the facing plate portion 153 deviates from the ball guide member 154, and the ball that has been confirmed not to win the general prize-winning port 63 (and the first prize-winning port 64 and the second prize-winning port 640) flows down. It is arranged on the back side of the path. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the opposing plate portion 153 on the flow-down manner of balls that are likely to enter the winning openings 63 , 64 , 640 .

In this embodiment, while the base plate 60 is configured to be made of a wooden plate member, the illumination device (for example, the LED member 544 of the rotation unit 500, see FIG. 25) arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 is viewed from the front side. It is possible to show the light emitted toward the player through an opening corresponding to the general prize winning opening 63 . Therefore, the surrounding facing plate portion 153, the upper plate portion 151, and the like do not emit light, and only the ball guide member 154 arranged corresponding to the general prize winning opening 63 emits light.

That is, for example, even if there is a long distance between the light emitting means and the ball guide member 154, the light is constricted by the opening formed in the base plate 60 at the position corresponding to the general prize winning opening 63. It is possible to execute a lighting effect in which only the guide member 154 is lit. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED member 544 (see FIG. 25) of the rotating unit 500 (described later) can be emitted from the base plate 60 at a position corresponding to the general prize winning opening 63 without providing a dedicated light emitting means for emitting light from the ball guide member 154 . By reaching the opening formed in , it is possible to perform a light emitting effect for causing the ball guide member 154 to emit light.

As a result, it is possible to easily highlight a place (for example, the general prize winning opening 63) where the player can benefit from the arrival of the ball in the game area. Details of the left effect unit 150 will be described below.

6 is a front view of the left effect unit 150. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the ridge portion 155 is a portion formed to project from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the front-rear direction, and is the first ridge portion disposed further upstream. 156 and a second ridge portion 157 arranged downstream of the first ridge portion 156 . Although the shape (protrusion mode) differs between the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157, the basic idea is the same. Regarding the streak portion 157, the difference from the first projecting streak portion 156 will be explained, and the detailed explanation will be omitted.

The first ridge portion 156 is configured such that four ridges having substantially the same shape are arranged in a stepped manner. Since the ridges are formed in substantially the same shape in the front-rear direction, they can come into contact with the ball regardless of the front-rear position of the ball, and the ball can be decelerated.

Each of the ridges is arranged in each range obtained by dividing the range vertically below the ball guide member 154 into four equal parts in the left-right direction. That is, since the vertically downward range of the ball guide member 154 is formed with a lateral width of about 16 [mm], each projection is formed with a lateral width of about 4 [mm].

Each ridge is configured such that its vertical dimension gradually becomes shorter toward the downstream side. This vertical length difference is generated by adjusting the vertical length of the right side portion 156c of the protrusion. Therefore, the upper side portion 156a and the curved portion 156b of each protrusion have the same shape. Details of the upper side portion 156a, the curved portion 156b, and the right side portion 156c will be described later.

As described above, the difference in the vertical length of each ridge is caused by adjusting the vertical length of the right side 156c of the ridge, so the first ridge 156 has the same step width. On the other hand, it is formed in a staircase shape in which the vertical dimension of each step becomes smaller toward the bottom.

In particular, the difference between the vertical dimension of the leftmost projection and the vertical dimension of the adjacent projection on the right side is the maximum (about 0.35 [mm]). The dimensional difference is about half (approximately 0.16 to 0.18 [mm]). The vertical dimension of each protrusion will be described later.

According to this configuration, the deceleration effect on the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the first ridge portion 156 can be maximized in the first ridge (the leftmost ridge) and gradually reduced in the subsequent ridges. . As a result, moderate loads are applied to the sphere at a plurality of locations, so that the sphere can be sufficiently decelerated without locally overloading (stress concentration). In addition, compared to the case where the deceleration effect is constant for each ridge, the deceleration effect can be easily adapted to the change in speed (decrease in speed) of the ball rolling on the first ridge portion 156. As a result, excessive deceleration can be avoided, and unintentional stopping of the ball can be easily prevented.

In the second ridge portion 157, which will be described later, the difference in vertical dimension between adjacent ridges is all equal (equal difference) (approximately 0.11 [mm]), and the vertical dimension of the leftmost ridge is It does not employ a configuration that is dramatically large. The vertical dimension of each protrusion will be described later. The purpose of this is that the inclination of the lower plate portion 152 with respect to the horizontal is suppressed to the extent that it is not necessary to greatly decelerate the ball, and that the second ridge portion 157 is prevented from being damaged, details of which will be described later.

In addition, the outer shape of the game ball B1 that abuts the curved portion 156b of the upstream ridge and the upper side portion 156a of the downstream ridge at the position where the vertical height of the adjacent ridges is the smallest is illustrated by imaginary lines. . As shown in FIG. 6, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B1 is arranged to the right of the right end of the upper side portion 156a.

The arrangement of game balls that contact at two similar points by changing the contacting ridges is such that as the contacting ridges are located on the upstream side, the vertical dimension of the upstream side ridges becomes larger. The game ball is arranged on the right side, and naturally the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B1 is arranged on the right side of the right end of the upper side portion 156a.

Therefore, when the game ball B1 is arranged in a state sandwiched between adjacent protrusions, the weight of the game ball is directed in a direction in which it rolls downstream on the plurality of protrusions, so that the game ball is placed between the adjacent protrusions. It is possible to avoid stopping in a state of being sandwiched between rows.

The details of the configuration of each protrusion included in the first protrusion 156 will be described. Each projection has an upper side portion 156a extending from the left end with a downward inclination with respect to the horizontal direction, a curved portion 156b continuously formed from the right end of the upper side portion 156a, and a lower right end portion of the curved portion 156b. and a right side portion 156c extending downward along the vertical direction.

Since the upper side portion 156a is configured as a flat portion that slopes downward with respect to the horizontal direction when viewed from the front and extends flatly in the front-rear direction, it is easy to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface from unintentionally stopping. can do. The length of the upper side portion 156a in a front view is 3.15 [mm], the inclination angle of the upper side portion 156a with respect to the horizontal direction is about 7 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 35 degrees.

The curved portion 156b is a curved surface having a curved shape with a radius of about 1 [mm] when viewed from the front, and serves to assist rolling of the ball. That is, compared to the case where the curved portion 156b is configured as a corner portion, the contact between the ball and the ridge can be continued and the rolling state can be easily maintained, so the effect of decelerating the ball can be maintained. be able to.

The lower side portion 156c is designed to have lengths of approximately 1.42 [mm], approximately 1.58 [mm], approximately 1.76 [mm], and approximately 2.11 [mm] in order from the downstream side. Thereby, the vertical dimension of each protrusion is designed to be approximately 2.80 [mm], approximately 2.96 [mm], approximately 3.14 [mm], and approximately 3.49 [mm] in order from the downstream side. be.

Since the lower side portion 156c extends vertically in a front view and is configured as a planar portion that extends in a plane in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the ball from being displaced against the inclination of the lower plate portion 152. This makes it easier for the ball, which is about to be displaced away from the out port 71 (see FIG. 2), to flow down toward the out port 71 .

The angle of the lower side portion 156c with respect to the horizontal direction is about 90 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 56 degrees. In this manner, the inclination angle of the projection with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is configured such that the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the downstream side is larger than the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side.

As a result, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface is reduced for the ball that reaches the ridge from the upstream side, and a small deceleration effect is produced so that the ball does not stop, while the ball that reaches the ridge from the downstream side is produced. By increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, the velocity of the ball heading upstream can be effectively reduced, making it easier for the ball to flow downstream.

The second ridge portion 157 is configured such that the vertical width of each ridge is shorter than that of the first ridge portion 156, and this difference makes the length of the right side portion 156c of the second ridge portion 157 different. caused by Therefore, the shape of the upper side portion 156a, the inclination angle (that is, about 7 degrees) with respect to the horizontal direction, the shape of the curved portion 156b, and the like are configured similarly for each protrusion.

On the other hand, the lower plate portion 152 is configured in a curved shape in which the center of the curvature radius is arranged on the upper right side, and compared to the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) near the first ridge portion 156, Since the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) near the second ridge portion 157 is smaller, the angle between each ridge of the second ridge portion 157 and the lower plate portion 152 is equal to that of the first ridge portion. It differs from that described above for section 156 .

That is, the length of the upper side portion 156a of the second protrusion 157 in a front view is 3.15 [mm], the angle of the upper side portion 156a with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 19 degrees, and the right side portion 156c is below the right side portion 156c. The angle with respect to plate portion 152 is about 70 degrees. Thus, the angle of inclination of the ridge with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is greater than the numerical values given above for the first ridge portion 156, compared to the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side, on the downstream side. The angle with respect to portion 152 is configured to be greater.

As a result, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface of the ball reaching the ridge from the upstream side is increased more than the first ridge 156, and a small deceleration effect is obtained so as not to stop the ball. On the other hand, for the ball that reaches the ridge from the downstream side, by increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, the speed of the ball heading upstream is effectively reduced, and the ball reaches the downstream side It can be made easy to flow to.

The lower side portion 156c of the second ridge portion 157 has lengths of approximately 0.16 [mm], approximately 0.27 [mm], approximately 0.38 [mm], and approximately 0.49 [mm] in order from the downstream side. Designed with Thereby, the vertical dimension of each protrusion is designed to be approximately 1.54 [mm], approximately 1.65 [mm], approximately 1.76 [mm], and approximately 1.87 [mm] in order from the downstream side. be.

Each protrusion of the second protrusion 157 has a shorter vertical dimension at each step than each protrusion of the first protrusion 156, and a difference in vertical dimension between adjacent protrusions. are all equal (equivalence (approximately 0.11 [mm])). In other words, since the configuration in which the vertical dimension of the left end projection is dramatically large is not adopted, the rate of deceleration of the ball rolling on the upper surface can be made uniform, and countermeasures against the vulnerability of the left end can be taken. By doing so, the durability of the second protrusion can be improved.

The left effect unit 150 includes a diffusing portion 158 formed with a diffusing shape capable of diffusing light on the front side end surfaces of the upper plate portion 151 and the lower plate portion 152 . The diffusing part 158 diffuses the light that reaches the left effect unit 150 from the front side, or the light that reaches from the upper, lower, left, right, or rear side through the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), thereby producing linear light. It can be shown to the person, and the performance effect can be improved.

Since the diffusion portion 158 is also formed on the front side end surfaces of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157, the diffusion portion 158 can be partially widened. As a result, the width of the light visually recognized by the first projected streak portion 156 and the second projected streak portion 157 can be visually recognized in the surrounding area (where neither the first projected streak portion 156 nor the second projected streak portion 157 is formed). can be large compared to the width of the light to be projected.

In addition, the maximum width of light visible at the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the first ridge portion 156 is made larger than the maximum width of light visible at the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the second ridge portion 157. be able to. More specifically, the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusing portion 158 can be changed in stages corresponding to the vertical dimension of each of the protrusions described above. The projection with the smallest vertical dimension among the projections in the first projection 156 has a larger vertical dimension than the projection with the largest dimension. can be made wider than the width of light visually recognized at the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the second projection portion 157 .

As a result, the degree of attention of the player looking at the left effect unit 150 can be varied for each range. That is, the degree of attention of the second ridge portion 157 is higher than the degree of attention of a portion that is neither the first ridge portion 156 nor the second ridge portion 157, and the degree of attention of the second ridge portion 157 is higher than that of the second ridge portion 157. The degree of attention of the one protrusion 156 can be made higher.

A ball guiding member 154 arranged corresponding to the general prize winning opening 63 is arranged above the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 to which the degree of attention is increased. Since the basic game posture of the player is to look down on the general prize winning port 63 and the ball guide member 154 arranged in front of it, the ball guide member 154 arranged below the ball guide member 154 is placed in the field of vision. There is a high possibility that the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 will be included.

By increasing the degree of attention to the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 (by irradiating light), the player can easily grasp the left and right positions of the general winning opening 63 . As a result, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the general prize winning opening 63 and the ball guiding member 154 arranged on the front side thereof.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the degree of attention of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 is increased without directly lighting the general prize winning opening 63 and the ball guide member 154 or decorating them gorgeously. By increasing , it is possible to improve (make conspicuous) the attention of the general winning hole 63 and the ball guide member 154 .

Also, the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusing portion 158 is configured to vary depending on the vertical dimension of each projection, but the vertical dimension of the projection at the left end of the first projection portion 156 is remarkably large. Since it is configured, it is possible to exert an effect of strongly attracting the player's line of sight. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the left end protrusion of the first protrusion 156 as the most upstream position where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the upper plate portion 151 lands.

In addition, since the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusing portion 158 is configured to change depending on the vertical dimension of each protrusion, the width of the light is gradually reduced toward the downstream side (right side). be. As a result, the light that gradually becomes thinner toward the downstream side of the game area can be seen through the diffusion part 158, so that the trajectory of the ball can be indicated by the light, and the outer edge of the game area can be made different in thickness. By decorating with light (tapering light), it is possible to achieve an effect as a luminescence effect, such as forming a sharp appearance.

Flow-down paths L1 and L2 are illustrated in FIG. 6 as main examples of flow-down paths of the sphere. The flow-down route L1 is a route through which the ball that has reached the upper plate portion 151 falls from the right end of the upper plate portion 151. It reaches (lands on) the upper surface of the plate portion 152 .

The flow-down route L2 is a route through which a ball that has flowed down on a nail (not shown) and flowed down to the right without reaching the upper plate portion 151 flows down between the pair of ball guide members 154. The ball that has flowed down along the flow-down path L2 reaches (lands on) the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side of the second ridge portion 157 .

In this way, the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 are formed in a range different from the range in which the ball flowing down along the ball flow paths L1 and L2 reaches (lands on) the lower plate portion 152. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 from receiving the impact when the ball reaches (lands).

In addition, since the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 are disposed on the downstream side of the reach (landing) range of the ball, the ball that has flowed down along the flow-down paths L1 and L2 can be directed to the out port 71. You can slow down before you reach it. This makes it easier to avoid damage to the portion arranged in the path to the out port 71 due to the load (impact) received from the ball.

When the ball rolling on the lower plate portion 152 starts contacting the first ridge portion 156, the repulsive force given to the ball from the first ridge portion 156 does not lean towards the side where the ball reaches, but faces the right side. Because of this, the ball can be avoided from stopping. On the other hand, since the direction of the repulsive force depends on the shape of each ridge, it varies greatly depending on the side the ball reaches.

For example, when the ball reaches (starts contacting) the first protrusion 156 from the upstream side (left side), the direction of the repulsive force is perpendicular to the upper side portion 156a. Become. On the other hand, when the ball reaches (starts contacting) the first ridge portion 156 from the downstream side (right side), the direction of the repulsive force does not contact the right side portion 156c but is perpendicular to the curved portion 156b. Although it is generated in the direction, the load F2 is almost rightward.

Therefore, a ball arriving from the upstream side can be caused to change in speed in the horizontal direction gently, and a ball arriving from the downstream side can be caused to change in speed in the horizontal direction violently (speed can be reversed).

The ball may bounce leftward by colliding with another ball placed near the out port 71 or colliding with a structural member placed in front of the out port 71 . This ball has a low probability of reaching the first ridge portion 156 , but a high possibility of reaching the second ridge portion 157 , which is located lower and closer to the out port 71 .

Therefore, by forming the second protrusion 157 on the lower side of the ball guide member 154, the second protrusion 157 is provided at a position deviated from the landing position of the ball flowing down the downflow paths L1 and L2, but due to the above-mentioned circumstances, the ball bounces back. Since the ball may collide with the second protrusion 157, if the second protrusion 157 is fragile, the second protrusion 157 may be damaged by the impact of the collision of the ball. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each protrusion included in the second protrusion portion 157 is configured such that the difference in vertical dimension between adjacent protrusions is equal (equal difference), and the vertical dimension of the leftmost protrusion is equal. is not adopted. As a result, compared to the case where the specific ridge is excessively sharpened, the second ridge portion 157 can be configured to be less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since each of the protrusions is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the front-rear direction, the second protrusions are formed in a shape of a horn compared to the case of protruding in the shape of a horn. The portion 157 can be configured to be difficult to break.

7(a) is a cross-sectional view of the left effect unit 150 along line VIIa-VIIa of FIG. 6, and FIG. 7(b) is a cross-sectional view of left effect unit 150 along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b), the thickness of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 are configured to be the same, and the recesses having the depths corresponding to the opposite sides of the ridges are formed. A groove is formed. By making the thickness the same, it is possible to maintain high molding accuracy of the left effect unit 150 formed of a resin material.

While the thicknesses of the first and second ridges 156 and 157 are formed to be the same as described above, the diffusing portion 158 is formed so as to cover the groove from the front side. It is formed to protrude below the second protrusion 157 . That is, the diffusing portion 158 is formed with a width dimension equal to or larger than the thickness of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 .

As described above, the first ridge portion 156 is longer than the second ridge portion 157 in terms of the vertical dimension of each ridge. Deeper than part 157. Correspondingly, the width dimension (maximum value) of the diffusing portion 158 is such that the diffusing portion 158 arranged on the front side of the first ridge portion 156 is closer to the front side of the second ridge portion 157. It is longer than the diffuser 158 provided.

As a result, the width of the diffusing portion 158 can be widened regardless of the thickness of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157, so that the width of the light visually recognized through the diffusing portion 158 can be widened. can be done.

Accordingly, it is possible to improve attention to the diffusing portion 158 and the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 connected to the upper end portion of the diffusing portion 158. Whether or not a ball enters the general prize winning opening 63 can be grasped by looking in the direction toward the two protrusions 157 . This will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the line of sight YE1 of the player playing the game often follows a line (radial line) extending outward from the game area toward the back side. Therefore, the line of sight YE1 of the player looking at the protrusion 155 corresponding to the lower edge of the game area is inclined downward toward the back side.

A player looking in the direction of the line of sight YE1 can see not only the ridges 155 intersecting with the line of sight YE1 but also the light reflected by the ridges 155. - 特許庁That is, the reflected light R1 that is incident on the ridge portion 155 through the opposing plate portion 153 and reflected along the line of sight YE1 can be seen through the ridge portion 155 .

The reflected light R<b>1 travels downward through the ball guide member 154 , enters (reflects) the opposing plate portion 153 , and travels so as to enter (reflect) the ridge portion 155 . That is, the light source of the reflected light R1 is arranged above the ball guide member 154, and the opposing plate portion 153 serves as a reflecting means (for example, a mirror), so that the reflected light R1 reaches the ridge portion 155. .

In this way, the reflected light R1 is light that passes through the passage of the ball to the general prize winning opening 63 (see FIG. 5), which is the ball guiding member 154 . Therefore, when viewing the ridge portion 155 with the line of sight YE1, the ridge portion 155 may appear dark because the ball may be reflected on the ridge portion 155 or the light may be blocked by the sphere. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole 63 through the change in the reflected light R1. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to efficiently grasp profitable information while reducing fatigue of the player. This will be explained below.

Conventionally, in a game when the game state is normal, the player often moves his or her line of sight between the general prize winning opening 63 and the vicinity of the inner rail 61 . This is to obtain information useful for the game from the falling state of the ball in the game area.

First, when a ball enters the general winning hole 63, prize balls (5 to 15 balls in this embodiment) are paid out. It can be judged that the pachinko machine 10 has good ball retention. Secondly, it can be determined that the higher the frequency of balls reaching the vicinity of the inner rail 61, the higher the frequency with which the balls are discharged from the outlet 71 of the pachinko machine 10 during play. At first glance, it seems that the pachinko machine 10 is more profitable for the player as the frequency of balls reaching the vicinity of the inner rail 61 is lower, but it is not so limited.

It is incomplete to grasp these pieces of information individually, and it is necessary to grasp them comprehensively. For example, just because the balls do not reach the vicinity of the inner rail 61 at a low frequency, it is not clear whether the pachinko machine 10 is profitable for the player.

Even in this case, if the frequency of ball entry into the general prize winning port 63 is excessively high, the frequency of ball entry into the first prize winning port 64 will be low, so the frequency of the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 during play. is considered to be low. Therefore, it can be expected that it will take a long time to win the jackpot, so there is a high possibility that it is not suitable for players who have a short time to play (there is a possibility that it is not profitable for the player). high).

From this point of view, it is necessary for the player to move his or her line of sight between the general prize winning opening 63 and the vicinity of the inner rail 61 to obtain information at each location. However, there is a problem that if the number of times the line of sight is moved is large, the fatigue of the player increases, which tends to lead to a decrease in motivation for the game.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured so that information on a plurality of locations can be obtained without moving the line of sight. In other words, the frequency of the ball reaching the vicinity of the inner rail 61 and the frequency of the ball entering the general prize winning opening 63 can be grasped without moving the line of sight YE1 from which the ridge portion 155 is viewed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and prevent the loss of motivation for the game, while allowing the player to efficiently grasp profitable information.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of a ball entering the general winning hole 63 can be determined by changing the aspect of the reflected light R1. Even exemplify. For example, it may be a shape with low light reflection efficiency due to texturing, or it may be mirror-finished, or another member (seal member or mirror-like member) having a mirror surface may be provided to improve the light reflection efficiency. can be raised.

Also, the angle between the plate front surface of the opposing plate portion 153 and the plate front surface of the base plate 60 is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, they may be parallel, or the front surface of the opposing plate portion 153 may be configured as an inclined surface. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately correspond to the position of the light source of the reflected light R1.

FIG. 8 is a sectional view of the game board 13 along line VIII-VIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the ball that has reached (landed on) the lower plate portion 152 flows down the game area through the downflow route L3.

The ball flowing down along the flow path L3 hits the glass unit 16 (front side) and the base plate 60 (rear side), reaches the front side of the out port 71, and then passes through the out port 71 and is discharged from the game area.

If the momentum of the ball is strong, there is a possibility that the ball popping out to the right from the lower end of the lower plate portion 152 will collide with the movable accessory 640a. If the movable accessory 640a is damaged by this collision, it becomes difficult to continue the normal game, so it is desirable to avoid the ball from colliding with the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, a front design member FD1 made of a light-transmitting resin is disposed on the front side of the movable accessory 640a, and the movable accessory 640a is covered with the front design member FD1. It is difficult to notice the presence or absence of damage. For this reason as well, it is required to prevent damage to the movable accessory 640a, and it is desirable to avoid collision of the ball with the movable accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing the ridge portion 155 in the flow-down path L3 and decelerating the ball, the ball jumping rightward from the lower end portion of the lower plate portion 152 reaches the movable accessory 640a. You are dropping the momentum of the ball below what it needs to be. This can prevent damage to the movable accessory 640a.

As shown in FIG. 8, the ridge portion 155 is arranged at a position included in the lateral width of the ball guide member 154 when viewed from above. More specifically, the ball guide member 154 is such that the sum of the lateral width of the path through which the ball passes and the lateral width of the pair of fastening portions disposed on the left and right of the ball guide member 154 is equal to the lateral width of the protrusion 155 (approximately 16 mm). ]) is configured as above.

Thereby, the ball guide member 154 can be used as a protective member for the ridge portion 155 . That is, when a ball falls toward the ridge portion 155, the ball guide member 154 interferes with the falling path of the ball, so that the falling path of the ball can be changed. Collision (landing) on the part 155 can be easily avoided (the frequency can be reduced).

Therefore, the contact between the ball and the ridge portion 155 can be easily limited to the contact with the ball flowing down (rolling) after landing on the lower plate portion 152. The portion 155 can be prevented from being cracked or damaged, and the ball deceleration effect of the ridge portion 155 can be maintained for a long period of time.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. Although an opening is formed, this embodiment is characterized by the shape of the window portion 60a with respect to the shape of the center frame 86. As shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the base plate 60. FIG. In FIG. 9 , lines indicating the shape of the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60 are schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, the center frame 86 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged to face the base plate 60 from the front side, and has a flat plate portion 86a formed with a through hole through which a fastening screw is passed; Boundary wall portion 86b, which extends like a wall on the front side of the flat plate portion 86a and constitutes the boundary portion of the game area, and the inner rail 61 and the lower left part of the boundary wall portion 86b. In FIG. 9, the boundary wall portion 86b and the branch plate portion 86c are provided in parallel with the adjacent boundary wall portion 86b (see FIG. 5). The shape of 86b and the shape of the flow dividing plate portion 86c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the range where the boundary wall portion 86b constitutes the rolling surface (flowing surface) of the sphere (the range in which the normal line passing through the outer surface of the boundary wall portion faces upward), the window portion of the base plate 60 60a is provided in a range extending to the outside of the boundary wall portion 86b when viewed from the front. Therefore, light can pass through the window portion 60a not only inside the boundary wall portion 86b (center side of the window portion 60a) but also outside the boundary wall portion 86b.

As a result, the light passing through the window portion 60a can be applied to the ball rolling on the upper surface of the boundary wall portion 86b, and the light emitting effect of making the ball shine can be executed. Here, the upper surface of the boundary wall portion 86b is a place that is likely to be a blind spot for the player who plays the game while paying attention to the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the ball is likely to be partially hidden. Although it is likely to be a difficult place, the state of the light passing through the window part 60a changes depending on the presence or absence of the ball, so the player can easily grasp the presence or absence of the ball by confirming the state of the light. can do.

Also, in the present embodiment, this blind spot is used to improve the efficiency of the area where the effect is executed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 10 .

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game machine 13 taken along line XX in FIG. FIG. 10 shows an example of the arrangement of the eyes of the player when playing the game while viewing the third symbol display device 81 from the front. In the arrangement of the eyes shown in FIG. 10, the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized with the line of sight YE2 in the front-rear direction, while the boundary wall portion 86b disposed on the upper portion of the center frame 86 is arranged so as to look up. It is visually recognized with the line of sight YE3 of the directional view.

When viewing the game area with the line of sight YE3, at least a part of the field of view is blocked by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion arranged inside (lower side) thereof, and the blocked range is blocked by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion. SE1 becomes difficult to see (becomes a blind spot). In this embodiment, the base plate 60 is deliberately opened to provide a window portion 60a at a position overlapping the shielded range SE1 in the front-rear direction. In other words, by not treating the shielded range SE1 as a place where a pattern or figure is drawn, the blind spot range is effectively utilized. This will be explained below.

Conventionally, when the base plate 60 is made of a wooden member, a sticker with a pattern or figure drawn (printed) is attached mainly to the area on the back side of the game area, thereby creating individuality for each game machine. decoration method was used.

In this case, even if a pattern or figure is drawn in a range that is likely to be a blind spot, such as the boundary wall portion 86b and the wall-like portion that protrudes toward the game area side, such as the decorative portion, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. It is difficult to increase the effect.

There is also the option of not affixing the seal to the range that is likely to become a blind spot, thereby reducing the area of the seal and thereby reducing the material cost of the seal, but the player's line of sight is not always fixed. Therefore, when the line of sight changes and the part where the sticker is not attached and the base plate 60 (wooden plate member) is exposed is visually recognized, it gives the player the impression that it looks cheap, which discourages the player from wanting to play. may lead to decline. Therefore, it is difficult to say that the option of not attaching a decorative seal to a range that is likely to become a blind spot is preferable, and an improvement has been desired.

In addition, when a pattern or figure is completed in a range outside the blind spot, it is necessary to draw the pattern or figure in a narrower range than the already limited size of the game area. It was difficult to increase the degree of freedom of

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing the window portion 60a in the base plate 60 in a range that overlaps at least a part of the shielded range SE1, the shielded range SE1 is not used as a place for drawing a figure or a pattern. It is used as a light path. That is, according to the present embodiment, the transmitted light R2 emitted from the rendering means (for example, the supported means 760, see FIG. 37) arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and traveling to the front side is the shielded range. It can be configured to transmit through the flat plate portion 86a in SE1.

As a result, even if the player selects not to put a sticker with a pattern or figure on the shielded area SE1, the player who sees the shielded area SE1 is illuminated by the transmitted light R2. Since the shining flat plate portion 86a can be exposed, the possibility of giving the player a cheap impression can be reduced, and as a result, the loss of motivation to play can be prevented.

In addition, since the line of sight YE3 and the transmitted light R2 overlap, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern or figure drawn on the sticker stuck on the base plate 60 and the transmitted light R2 superimposed. . At least, the appearance of the game area viewed by the line of sight YE3 can be changed between the irradiation state and the non-irradiation state of the transmitted light R2, so that the degree of freedom in decorating the game area can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hidden range SE1 as a blind spot can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in decorating the game board 13 can be increased.

In this embodiment, the boundary wall portion 86b includes a left boundary wall portion 86b1 extending from the upper end portion to the lower left side, and a right boundary wall portion 86b2 extending from the upper end portion to the lower right side. Each has a linear area through which visible light passes in the game area, but has different widths.

That is, on the right boundary wall portion 86b2 side, the distance between the outer rail 62 and the outer edge member 73 is narrow, and the path of the sphere is almost constant, so that the width of the passage of light is also narrow (approximately 5 [mm] or less). . On the other hand, on the left boundary wall portion 86b1 side, the locations where the ball lands are different depending on the launch strength, and the way it bounces after landing depends on whether it collides with a nail (not shown) before it lands. Since it changes, the path of the sphere is unlikely to be constant (dispersion occurs). Therefore, in the present embodiment, one purpose is to deal with variations in the flow-down path of the sphere, and the width of the light passage is widened (up to about 12 [mm]).

In particular, around the flow dividing plate portion 86c, the window portion 60a is provided so as to extend to a position overlapping both the left and right ranges of the flow dividing plate portion 86c, and the width through which light passes is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere (approximately 11 [ mm] or more). As a result, the transmitted light R2 can be applied to the sphere flowing down either the left or right side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the shape of the window portion 60a is designed so that the transmitted light R2 can easily hit the ball rolling on the boundary wall portion 86b. can be illuminated with transmitted light R2. Therefore, even if the sphere is blocked by the boundary wall portion 86b and flows down a place that is likely to become a blind spot, the appearance of the transmitted light R2 can be changed according to the presence or absence of the sphere. It is possible to make the player easily comprehend.

An example of the irradiation mode of the transmitted light R2 will be described. For example, light is emitted to the left boundary wall portion 86b1 side when informing the player to play with the left hand, and light is emitted to the right boundary wall portion 86b2 side when informing the player to play with the right hand. may be controlled to irradiate. In this case, by looking at the boundary wall portion 86b, the player can easily grasp whether the ball should be shot left-handed or right-handed.

Moreover, the irradiation mode of the transmitted light R2 is not limited at all. For example, an irradiation mode in which lighting is continued may be employed, or an irradiation mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated (blinking) may be employed.

Further, the illumination mode for lighting the surroundings of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is not limited at all. For example, an irradiation mode in which both the left and right of the flow dividing plate portion 86c are illuminated, or an irradiation mode in which either the left or right of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is illuminated may be employed.

For example, if the game area is configured such that most of the cases where the balls flow on the left side of the diverter plate portion 86c are limited to when the ball's launch intensity weakens below a specific standard, only the left side of the diverter plate portion 86c In the control mode in which the transmitted light R2 is emitted so as to illuminate the ball, the player can easily grasp whether or not the firing intensity of the ball is weakened below a specific reference by confirming the brightness of the transmitted light R2. can do.

That is, when the sphere passes through the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c, the transmitted light R2 is blocked by the sphere, and the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is visually recognized darkly. can be associated with being weaker than a certain criterion. As a result, the stress felt by the player when adjusting (maintaining) the shooting intensity of the ball can be reduced compared to the case where the shooting intensity of the ball is grasped by confirming the landing position of the ball.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the blind spot blocked by the boundary wall portion 86b and the flow dividing plate portion 86c is configured as a path for the transmitted light R2 traveling from the back side to the front side, It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of light production in the game area. The range in which the blind spot is formed is not limited to the upper side of the boundary wall portion 86b or the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c, and various modes are exemplified.

For example, it may be the range below the pair of plate-shaped portions extending toward the left and right lower sides of the first winning port 64, or the range outside the inner rail 61 or the outer rail 62 (opposite side of the game area). , the range below the upper plate portion 151 (see FIG. 5) of the left effect unit 150 may be used, or the ball guide member 154 (see FIG. 5) that guides the ball to the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. It may be in the lower range, it may be in the lower range of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the lower right side of the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the right side of the game area, or it may be in the outer side of the center frame 86 ( It may be the range opposite to the third pattern display device 81 in a front view), or it may be the peripheral range of other plate-like portions projecting toward the front side of the base plate 60 .

Returning to FIG. 5, description will be made. The right effect unit 160 is a unit provided with a variable winning device 65, and is fitted into the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. A ball entered into the specific prize winning port 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable prize winning device 65 flows down a flow path FL1 (see FIG. 11) formed on the back side of the right effect unit 160, and flows down a ball discharge path (not shown). be guided to.

11 is a rear view of the right effect unit 160. FIG. The right effect unit 160 includes a base member 161 that has an open portion that opens toward the back side and constitutes the front side portion of the flow-down path FL1, and a first flow path member 162 that constitutes the back side portion of the flow-down path FL1. and a second flow path member 163, an adjustment member 165 disposed on the front side of the second flow path member 163 and configured to be fittable with the second flow path member 163, and an LED or the like that emits light toward the front side. and a plurality of electrical decoration boards 168 on which the light emitting means are arranged.

The game ball that has entered the downflow path FL1 through the specific winning opening 65a flows down the front side of the first flow path member 162 and then flows down the front side of the second flow path member 163 . That is, the first flow path member 162 constitutes the downstream path FL1 on the upstream side of the second flow path member 163 .

The illumination substrate 168 includes a first illumination substrate 168a arranged on the back side of the opening/closing plate of the variable winning device 65, a second illumination substrate 168b arranged on the back side outside the ball flow path, and a second illumination substrate 168b. A third decorative board 168c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the second flow path member 163 and arranged on the back side of the flow-down path FL1.

In addition, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of each LED (light-emitting means) is shown inside the electrical board 168 by hidden lines. As shown in FIG. 11 , the LEDs are distributed substantially uniformly on the illumination board 168 , rather than arranged in such a way that they are unevenly arranged.

With the first decorative board 168a, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that lights the opening/closing plate of the variable winning device 65 and the opening portion into which game balls can enter when the opening/closing plate is open. With the second electric decoration board 168b, regardless of the game ball flowing down inside the right effect unit 160, the light emitting effect can be executed in which the front design portion of the right effect unit 160 is illuminated.

With the third electric decoration board 168c, it is possible to execute a lighting effect in which the way of lighting changes in relation to the game ball flowing down the flow-down path FL1. That is, when a game ball is arranged in the second flow path member 163, the player can be made to visually recognize the shadow caused by the game ball blocking the light emitted from the third decorative board 168c. On the other hand, when the game ball is not arranged in the second channel member 163, the shadow of the game ball can be made invisible.

The light emitted from the third electrical board 168c passes through the second flow path member 163, the adjustment member 165, and the base member 161 in order, passes to the front side of the right effect unit 160, and is visually recognized by the player. As the number of passing members increases, the amount of visually recognized light tends to attenuate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the adjustment member 165 is arranged on the front side of the lower end portion of the second flow path member 163 (the end portion of the flow-down path FL1 and the range visually recognized by the player). , the location where the amount of light is likely to be attenuated can be limited to the vicinity of the end portion of the flow path FL1. As a result, compared to the case where the amount of light is attenuated in the middle position of the flow-down path FL1, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the light emitted from the third electrical decoration board 168c.

Furthermore, the ball passing through the flow-down path FL1 can be visually recognized even when viewed from the front, and the player usually looks down on the right side effect unit 160 arranged in the lower right part of the game area. Therefore, a straight line that connects the player's line of sight and the third electrical board 168c (a straight line that inclines obliquely downward as the player approaches the pachinko machine 10) connects the adjustment member 165 and the third electrical board 168c. There is a low possibility of intersecting with a line segment (straight line passing through part of the adjustment member 165 and extending in the front-rear direction).

This is an effect of arranging the adjusting member 165 away from the player's eyes (near the lower end position of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 2)). It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will pay attention to the range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adjustment member 165 from lowering the effect of the light emitted from the third decorative board 168c and viewed by the player.

12 is an exploded rear view of the right effect unit 160, FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the right effect unit 160, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit 160. FIG. 12, the first channel member 162 is assembled to the base member 161, and the second channel member 163 and the adjusting member 165 are shown disassembled for easy understanding.

The base member 161 has a semi-formed portion 161a that opens toward the rear side and forms the front side surface of the flow-down path FL1, and a female screw that protrudes toward the rear side in a columnar shape and is formed at the tip of the first flow path. A pair of columnar fastening portions 161b into which a fastening screw inserted through the member 162 is screwed, and a female that is longer than the columnar fastening portions 161b and protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side and is formed at the tip. A specific columnar fastening portion 161c into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the second flow path member 163 is screwed, and a plurality of thin plate-like members projecting radially outward from the base end side of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c. It has a ridge portion 161d and a concave portion 161e which is concavely formed from the back side to the front side of the base member 161 in a range including the specific columnar fastening portion 161c.

The plurality of protrusions 161d are formed at angular positions corresponding to the cutouts 165e and outer diameter recessed portions 165g of the adjustment member 165, and by aligning the cutouts 165e with the protrusions 161d, the adjustment member 165 can be easily aligned during assembly.

The recessed portion 161e is recessed in a shape corresponding to the plate-like portion 165a of the adjustment member 165 (a shape larger by the adjustment width) and functions as a recess for arranging the plate-like portion 165a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 11) in which the plate-like portion 165a is arranged in the recessed portion 161e, the back surface of the plate-like portion 165a is arranged on the surface on which the back surface of the base member 161 is arranged (in other words, , the rear surface of the base member 161 and the rear surface of the plate-like portion 165a are arranged flush with each other).

That is, although the adjustment member 165 is a member arranged on the front side of the flow-down path FL1, the difference in arrangement within the recessed portion 161e does not affect the shape of the flow-down path FL1. Therefore, as will be described later, even if the position of the adjusting member 165 is adjusted by the adjustment width between the recessed portion 161e, it is possible to prevent the shape of the flow-down path FL1 from changing due to the position adjustment. .

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the adjusting member 165, if the base member 161, the first flow path member 162, and the second flow path member 163 are assembled in an arrangement suitable for causing the ball to flow down, the ball will flow down the downflow path FL1. can flow down. Therefore, compared to the case where the adjustment member 165 is also formed with a part of the channel shape (for example, half-pipe shape) as seen in the semi-formed portions 161a, 162a, and 163a, it is easier to assemble the right effect unit 160. Difficulty can be lowered.

The first flow path member 162 has a semi-formed portion 162a that opens toward the front side and forms the rear side surface of the flow-down path FL1, and a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 161b. a pair of insertion holes 162b, and a columnar fastening portion 162c projecting toward the back side and having a female thread formed at the tip thereof, into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the second flow path member 163 is screwed.

The second flow path member 163 has a semi-formed portion 163a that opens toward the front side and forms the rear side surface of the flow-down path FL1, and a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162b. an insertion hole 163b through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the specific columnar fastening portion 161c can be inserted; and a plurality of fitting protrusions 163d.

The adjusting member 165 is a member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed in a plate shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the recessed portion 161e and a thickness equivalent to the recessed depth of the recessed portion 161e. a plurality of fitting holes 165b drilled in the plate-like portion 165a at positions corresponding to the fitting protrusions 163d with diameters slightly larger than the diameter of the fitting protrusions 163d; A chamfered portion 165c is chamfered at the corner where the upper surface and the back surface of the plate-like portion 165a intersect; A notch portion 165e is formed by taper from the edge of the plate toward the bottom of the dish, and a notch portion 165e is bored in the center of the bottom of the dish portion 165d with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the diameter of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c in the front-rear direction. An adjustment hole 165f is provided, and a plurality of outer diameter recessed portions 165g are provided in the adjustment hole 165f toward the outer diameter direction of the adjustment hole 165f.

The fitting hole 165b is configured to be able to fit into the fitting protrusion 163d of the second flow path member 163 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). It can be strengthened.

More specifically, the second flow path member 163 is designed not only from the viewpoint of material cost, but also because the light emitted from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged in front of the third decorative board 168c is visible to the player. For the purpose of facilitating ease of use (for the purpose of suppressing attenuation of light), it is desirable to form it with a thin thickness.

On the other hand, if the second flow path member 163 is formed thin, there is a risk that the second flow path member 163 will be deformed outward in the flow path due to the load given by the game ball flowing down without countermeasures. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by fitting the fitting protrusion 163d of the second flow path member 163 into the fitting hole 165b, it is possible to generate a resistance force against the outward load of the flow path. . Thereby, deformation of the second channel member 163 can be prevented.

The chamfered portion 165c is a processed portion for avoiding the corners from colliding with the sphere flowing down the flow-down path FL1. Therefore, it suffices to form only the minimum portion (for example, the range between the pair of fitting holes 165b) opposed to the ball flowing down the flow-down path FL1. processing costs can be reduced.

By forming the chamfered portion 165c at the corner facing the sphere flowing down the flow-down path FL1, even if the adjustment member 165 protrudes from the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 to the back side due to dimensional error or the like. , the collision point between the sphere and the adjusting member 165 can be configured as a surface. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjusting member 165 will be damaged, and to reduce the flow-down resistance of the ball.

Since the dish portion 165d protrudes toward the rear side compared to the plate-like portion 165a, it is easy to grasp and functions as a handle when removing the adjustment member 165 during assembly or maintenance. At the time of assembly, since the notch 165e is tapered, the notch 165e is easily guided by the protrusion 161d, so that the posture of the adjusting member 165 can be easily adjusted. Therefore, the assembly work of inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c into the adjustment hole 165f can be easily performed.

In a state in which the specific columnar fastening portion 161c is inserted into the adjustment hole 165f, the posture of the adjustment member 165 can be changed (adjusted) up to the gap dimension between the notch portion 165e and the outer diameter recessed portion 165g and the protrusion portion 161d. )can do. In addition, the aspect of adjustment is mentioned later.

The purpose of configuring the adjusting member 165 as a variable member will now be described. In this embodiment, both the first flow path member 162 on the upstream side and the second flow path member 163 on the downstream side form the front side shape of the flow-down path FL1 using the back side shape of the base member 161. Compared to the case where other members constituting the front side shape of the flow path FL1 are individually prepared for the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163, the number of members constituting the flow path FL1 is reduced. can do. Thereby, material cost can be reduced.

On the other hand, since resin molding causes variations in dimensions, flow path members having exactly the same shape cannot be produced. The sphere may not pass through the downflow path FL1 depending on how the dimensional variation of the flow path member occurs. Therefore, in the actual assembly process, when fastening and fixing the first flow path member 162 to the base member 161, it is confirmed that the ball passes through the flow-down path FL1, and the first flow path member 162 is positioned at a position where the ball can pass. are fastened and fixed, and then the second downstream path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162c of the first flow path member 162 and the specific columnar fastening portion 161c of the base member 161 .

Thus, it is preferable to provide a certain range of adjustment width at the position where the first flow path member 162 is fixed to the base member 161 . In this embodiment, the difference between the inner diameter of the insertion hole 162b and the outer diameter of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 162b can be used as the adjustment width. In addition, regardless of the adjustment width, the second flow path member 163 is directly fastened and fixed to the first flow path member 162 in the vicinity of the connection position of the flow path FL1, so the shape of the flow path FL1 can be easily ensured.

In this case, the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162 also affects the second flow path member 163 . Here, as described above, the rigidity of the second flow path member 163 can be improved not only by arranging the second flow path member 163 so as to face the rear surface of the base member 161 but also by fitting them. However, when the fitting portion is fixedly arranged on the base member 161, the fitting portion on the side of the base member 161 and the fitting portion on the side of the second flow path member 163 are affected by the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162. misalignment, resulting in assembly failure.

In consideration of this positional deviation, the fitting portion on the side of the base member 161 and the fitting portion on the side of the second flow path member 163 may be fitted with a clearance fit. This is not preferable because the effect of strengthening the rigidity of the member 163 is lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the adjustment member 165 is provided with the fitting portion on the base member 161 side, and the adjustment member 165 is configured to be adjustable with an adjustment width exceeding the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162 . Therefore, the positional deviation of the fitting portion caused by the positional adjustment of the first flow path member 162 can be offset, and the occurrence of assembly failure can be avoided.

In this case, it is not necessary to secure a sufficient gap between the fitting hole 165b of the adjusting member 165 and the fitting protrusion 163d of the second flow path member 163. The rigidity of the two-channel member 163 can be sufficiently enhanced.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the difference between the dimensions of the base member 161 and the adjustment member 165 is used as the adjustment width. For example, by setting the width wa1 of the protrusion 161d of the base member 161 shorter than the width wa2 of the outer diameter recessed portion 165g of the adjustment member 165, the adjustment width can be secured (wa1< wa2).

Further, for example, the width wb1 of the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 is longer than the width wb2 of the plate-like portion 165a of the adjusting member 165, so that the adjustment width can be secured (wb1> wb2).

As the second channel member 163 is fastened and fixed, the adjustment hole 165f of the adjustment member 165 is supported by the specific columnar fastening portion 161c so as not to fall off, and the fitting convex portion 163b is inserted into the fitting hole 165b to form a plate. The rear surface of the shaped portion 165a is supported by the front side end portion of the semi-formed portion 163a of the second flow path member 163 so as to be able to abut between the base member 161 and the second flow path member 163. .

Therefore, a dedicated fastener for fastening and fixing the adjustment member 165 can be made unnecessary, so that reduction in the number of fasteners can reduce the product cost and reduce the number of assembly man-hours.

Returning to FIG. 5, description will be made. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. The operation unit 300 will be described below.

15 and 16 are front views of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 15 and 17 show a state in which each movable member (each movable accessory) of the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 is arranged at the standby position, and FIG. 16 shows the first operation unit A state in which each movable member (each movable accessory) of 400 and second operation unit 700 is arranged in an overhanging position in front of third pattern display device 81 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 15, 16 and 17, the action unit 300 includes vertically arranged movable accessories that displace the front side of the third pattern display device 81 in the vertical direction. The roles differ from each other in shape and action mode.

The vertically arranged movable accessories are configured to be independently drivable, and are configured to hide most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 by arranging both of them in overhanging positions. In other words, when either one of the movable accessory placed on the upper side and the movable accessory placed on the lower side is placed in the extended position, the other range of the third symbol display device 81 is movable. To execute a liquid crystal performance by using this range without being hidden by a character, and to execute a performance combining the liquid crystal performance and a movable accessory arranged at an overhanging position. can be done.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the movable accessories placed on the lower side are arranged in the left-right direction, and each movable accessory is configured to be able to move up and down independently. Therefore, in addition to the state in which all movable accessories are placed in the overhang position (see FIG. 16), a state in which only a part (for example, the left end) of the movable accessory is placed in the overhang position, or It is possible to construct a state in which movable accessories are arranged at different vertical heights between the position and the standby position.

18 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. FIG. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and an outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311 and a rear case 310 formed in a box shape whose front side is open.

A rectangular opening 311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, so that the rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit 300 includes a first operation unit 400 arranged in the inner space of the rear case 310 so that the movable accessory can be displaced along a path including the lower side of the opening 311a, and on both left and right sides of the opening 311a, A left and right effect unit 600 that performs light emission effects, etc., and a second action unit 700 in which a movable accessory is arranged to be displaceable along a path including the upper side of the opening 311a are respectively accommodated, and these are configured as one unit. .

Specifically, the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are provided on the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 below the opening 311a and above the opening 311a, respectively. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are disassembled from the back case 310 .

The left and right effect unit 600 is provided with an electric board having light emitting means such as an LED inside. It is characterized by being inclined to As a result, the optical axes of the light emitting means intersect on the player's front side, so that the light emitted from the left and right effect units 600 can be viewed three-dimensionally.

The back case 310 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall 312, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 313 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 313 includes a positioning convex portion 313a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 313a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 300 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

In addition, the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 18, in this embodiment, a large number of support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310, and less support plate portions 313 are formed on the right side and the lower side. However, this is the result of design considering the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of plywood in which plywood is laminated as in this embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. becomes invisible, the entire back side of the area where an opening can be formed (or formed recessed from the side) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is effective as an area for effect where the movable member is arranged so as to be visible. .

On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the inner space of the rear case 310 is eroded inwardly by the area of the support plate portion 313 when viewed from the front. This narrows the area where it can be arranged. Therefore, even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, if the problem of strength can be maintained while being resolved, it is said that by omitting the support plate portion 313, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the arrangement range of the movable member. That is.

In this embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 because of the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the balls shot into the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball preventing member 68 to play the game. It is configured to be introduced into the area (see FIG. 2) and thereafter flow down the game area. In a pinball game, the point where the most attention is considered to be the point where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 or the inner rail 61) ) is usually low in attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left with reference to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left and upper right with reference to the upward convex arc are the ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is conceivable that the player's attention to .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the surfaces of the outer edge member 73 and the lower left and upper left portions of the outer rail 62 facing the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material. Since the rear side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized through the block-like member 74, the attention of the player is further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged at the locations where the attention force is low and the locations that are invisible. Actually, even in the left side and the upper side where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portions 313 are formed near the corners of the rear case 310, avoiding the central portion as the projecting end portion of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole is increased by selecting the portion where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the portion with low visibility (low effect performance). It is possible to ensure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball while achieving the effect of securing the ball.

From this point of view, since the pachinko machine has a common configuration in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) rolls along the outer rail 62 and is introduced into the game area, there is a range in which the ball does not flow down. can be easily arranged in the lower left, upper left and upper right.

In this embodiment, the support plate portion 313 extending from the outer wall portion 312 on the lower side is arranged to be shifted toward the back side from the support plate portions 313 extending from the outer wall portions 312 on the left, right and upper sides. . With this configuration, the positioning projections 313a formed on the left, right, and upper support plate portions 313 are fitted into the fitting recesses formed on the back surface of the base plate 60, while the lower support plate portions 313 The formed positioning protrusion 313a is not directly fitted to the base plate 60, but has a shape corresponding to a spherical flow downward unit (not shown) disposed on the back side of the base plate 60. and is fitted into the shape. That is, the positioning protrusion 313a arranged on the lower side of the rear case 310 is indirectly fixed to the base plate 60 via the spherical flow downward unit.

19 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. FIG. The first motion unit 400 includes a base member 401 which is fitted into the rear case 310 from the front side and fastened and fixed. It is fastened and fixed in a position aligned with the

The compound action unit 402 includes a rotating unit 500 which is formed in a substantially dice shape and configured to be rotatable about a lateral axis, and a mechanism for vertically displacing the rotating unit 500 . Details of the composite action unit 402 will be described below.

21(a) and 21(b) are front perspective views of the compound action unit 402, and FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b) are rear perspective views of the compound action unit 402. FIG. 21(a) and 22(a) show a state in which the rotating unit 500 is placed at the raised position, and FIGS. 21(b) and 22(b) show the rotating unit 500 at the lowered position. The arranged state is illustrated.

In the compound motion unit 402, the columnar member 431 guides the rotation unit 500 in the vertical direction, and the driving motor 441 generates driving force for moving the rotation unit 500 vertically. The electrical wiring DK1 guided inside the rotating unit 500 is composed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires, and hangs down along the left and right sides opposite to the side on which the columnar member 431 is arranged, and is attached to the wiring auxiliary means 460 while being slackened. configured to be accessible. Each configuration of the composite action unit 402 will be described below.

23 and 24 are exploded front perspective views of compound action unit 402. FIG. Note that FIGS. 23 and 24 show a state in which the disassembly of the rotation unit 500 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the composite action unit 402 includes support means 410 that supports the rotation unit 500, stacking means 420 stacked and fixed to the support means 410, and movement directions of the stacking means 420. Guide means 430 that guides the movement of the support means 410 by limiting the movement to one direction (vertical direction in this embodiment), drive means 440 that has a drive motor 441 that generates a driving force for moving the support means 410, A split base member 442 that supports the drive motor 441, a transmission means 450 that meshes with the drive gear 441a of the drive motor 441 and is configured to transmit the driving force, and a length that can correspond to the movement amount of the support means 410. It is mainly provided with a wiring auxiliary means 460 configured to be able to arrange (accommodate) the electric wiring DK1 without entanglement or pinching.

The support means 410 includes a flat plate portion 411 formed in a flat plate shape, an annular protrusion 412 annularly protruding from the upper surface of the flat plate portion 411, and a central portion of the annular protrusion 412 opened vertically. A deformed hole 413 formed as a through hole, a front hanging portion 414 bent downward from the front edge portion of the flat plate portion 411, and a plate-like portion connected to the left end of the front hanging portion 414. A left hanging portion 415 formed by bending downward from the left edge of the flat plate portion 411, and an elongated hole extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the left hanging portion 415, and a connecting member 454 of the transmission means 450 is inserted therethrough. and a connecting plate portion 416 having an elongated through hole 416a.

The stacking means 420 includes an end plate member 421 configured as a substantially symmetrical plate-like member, recessed portions 422 formed in the front and rear end portions of the end plate member 421, and housed in the recessed portion 422. A guide cylindrical portion 423 configured in a cylindrical shape of a possible size, and a right side that is disposed between the end plate member 421 and the support means 410, is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 421, and covers the concave portion 422 from the right side. A lid member 424 is mainly provided.

The guide tubular portion 423 is accommodated only in the recessed portion 422 at the front end of the recessed portions 422 recessed at the front and rear ends of the end plate member 421, and is housed only in the recessed portion 422 at the rear end. 422 is not provided (disposition is omitted).

As a result, similar to the case where the guide tubular portion 423 is provided in both the front and rear recessed portions 422, the rear side of the rotary unit 500 is supported by the transmission means 450 when the rotary unit 500 is placed in the lowered position or the raised position. Since it is possible to minimize the posture deviation occurring at the front end farthest from the end (see FIG. 34(c)), the arrangement of the rotating unit 500 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the guide tubular portion 423 is provided in both the front and rear recessed portions 422, the gap between the recessed portion 422 and the columnar member 431 at the rear end supported by the transmission means 450 is reduced. can be made more open, the resistance generated when the stacking means 420 moves up and down can be reduced.

The right cover member 424 has a pair of insertion holes 424a through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the end plate member 421 are inserted, and a left side hanging of the support means 410 which is inserted through the right cover member 424 from the end plate member 421 side. A plurality of insertion openings 424b through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the portion 415 can be inserted, and a guide cylindrical portion 423 of the stacking means 420 are recessed in a shape that prevents them from falling off in the vertical direction. and a recessed support 424c provided.

The guide means 430 is composed of a pair of front and rear metal columnar members 431 arranged so as to pass through at least one of the guide cylindrical portion 423 and the recessed portion 422, and a metal plate arranged on the left surface of the columnar member 431. an upper bent portion 433 bent rightward from the upper portion of the metal plate portion 432; and a lower bent portion bent rightward from the lower portion of the metal plate portion 432. It mainly includes a side bent portion 434 and a rear bent portion 435 bent rightward from the rear side portion of the metal plate portion 432 .

The metal plate portion 432 is cut downward from the top and formed in a U shape when viewed from the left side. As a result, an assembly worker or a maintenance worker can reach the front-rear middle portion of the end plate member 421 (the portion between the pair of front-rear recessed portions 422) through the notched range, so assembly work or maintenance work can be performed easily. The efficiency of work can be improved, and the details will be described later.

The metal plate portion 432 is arranged close to the end plate member 421 in the left-right direction at locations other than the central portion in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if the end plate member 421 is displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement can be restricted not only by contact with the columnar member 431 but also by contact with the metal plate portion 432 . .

As a result, since the lateral displacement of the stacking means 420 can be suppressed, the lateral displacement of the support means 410 fastened and fixed to the stacking means 420 and the transmission means 450 connected to the support means 410 is suppressed. can be suppressed.

The upper bent portion 433 and the lower bent portion 434 are through holes drilled at positions overlapping each other when viewed in the vertical direction, and support holes 433a and 433a formed with a size that allows the columnar member 431 to be inserted and supported. 434a.

In the assembled state, the columnar member 431 is inserted through the support holes 433a and 434a, and the end portions are formed with a length that protrudes slightly from the upper side of the upper bent portion 433 and the lower side of the lower bent portion 434 ( See FIG. 21(a)). A so-called "E-ring" is fitted into a groove formed in the slightly overhanging portion from the outer diameter direction to prevent the columnar member 431 from slipping out of the support holes 433a and 434a.

The lower bent portion 434 stably supports the split base member 442 while supporting it. In this supported state, the rear side plate portion of the divided base member 442 overlaps the rear bent portion 435 in the front-rear direction, and the rear surface through the base member 401 (see FIG. 20) disposed on the rear side of the divided base member 442. The base member 401, the split base member 442, and the guide means 430 can be integrally fixed by fastening and fixing the fastening screw inserted from the side to the female screw portion formed in the rear bent portion 435. .

The driving means 440 is divided into right and left components according to function by a partition plate portion 442 a of a split base member 442 . That is, on the left side of the partition plate portion 442a, a structure for transmitting driving force (transmitting means 450, etc.) is arranged, and on the right side of the partition plate portion 442a, a structure for power supply or power is supplied. Configurations (the main body of the drive motor 441, the wiring auxiliary means 460 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is accommodated, etc.) are arranged. 23 and 24, the electric wiring DK1 used for power supply is not shown, but the relationship and displacement of the electric wiring DK1 with the auxiliary wiring means 460 will be described later.

The drive motor 441 is attached to the partition plate portion 442a from the right side, and the drive gear 441a protrudes to the left side of the partition plate portion 442a through an opening formed in the partition plate portion 442a. When the drive motor 441 is driven and the drive gear 441a rotates in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the driving force is transmitted to the transmission means 450 through the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the drive gear 441a.

The partition plate portion 442a has a plurality of projecting portions 442b projecting leftward from the left surface in a columnar shape, and an axis that is fixed above the projecting portion 442b at the upper end and parallel to the projecting direction of the projecting portion 442b. A metal cylindrical portion 442c formed in a cylindrical shape, a photocoupler-type detection sensor 442d fastened and fixed in a posture in which the detection groove is disposed opposite to the metal cylindrical portion 442c, and an opening formed in the left-right direction. A part 442e is mainly provided.

The protruding portion 442b is configured to be able to pivotally support the transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452, respectively, and has a female screw formed at the tip of the protruding portion. , the transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452 can be pivotally supported so as not to fall off. The metal columnar portion 442c is formed with a diameter that allows the rotary arm member 453 to be pivotally supported.

The detection sensor 442d is configured to be able to detect that the detection target plate portion 453d of the rotating arm member 453 is arranged in the detection groove. Thereby, the position of the rotating arm member 453 can be detected.

The opening 442e is an opening for passing the electric wiring DK1 reaching between the divided base member 442 and the wiring auxiliary means 460 in the left-right direction and guiding it to the rear side, the details of which will be described later.

The transmission means 450 includes a transmission gear 451 that meshes with the drive gear 441a, an intermediate gear 452 that is arranged above the transmission gear 451 (on the opposite side of the drive gear 441a) and meshes with the transmission gear 451, and the intermediate gear 452. A rotating arm member 453 having a gear portion 453a that meshes with the rotating arm member 453 and a connecting member 454 that is supported by the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 453 so as not to fall off.

The rotating arm member 453 is a member that is rotatably supported by the metal cylindrical portion 442c of the partition plate portion 442a, and includes a gear portion 453a formed in a gear tooth shape along an arc centered on the rotation axis, An extension arm portion 453b extending radially outward at a position shifted in the axial direction with respect to the gear portion 453a, and an opening formed in a direction parallel to the rotation axis at the extension tip portion of the extension arm portion 453b. and a detection target plate portion 453d extending along the rotation direction from the extension arm portion 453b.

The connecting member 454 has a brass columnar supported portion 454a whose distal end is inserted into the elongated through hole 416a, and a flange portion 454c that is fitted to the proximal end of the supported portion 454a and protrudes from the proximal end in a flange shape. It mainly includes a fitting lid portion 454b made of synthetic resin.

A well-known E-ring (not shown) is fitted to the tip of the supported portion 454a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from dropping leftward from the long through-hole 416a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling off and losing the connecting member 454 before the stacking means 420 and the guiding means 430 are assembled to the split base member 442 (during assembly).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 22(a)), the right cover member 424 is arranged opposite to the left side of the connecting member 454 (arranged so as to overlap in the left-right direction), so that the left side of the connecting member 454 dropout is physically regulated.

The outer diameter of the fitting lid portion 454b is formed to be shorter than the vertical width of the elongated through hole 416a, and the outer diameter of the flange portion 454c is formed to be longer than the vertical width of the elongated through hole 416a. Accordingly, by arranging the resin fitting lid portion 454b between the long through-hole 416a and the supported portion 454a made of metal, deformation of the long through-hole 416a can be suppressed. Since the portion 454c is configured to have a size that cannot pass through the elongated through hole 416a, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling rightward from the elongated through hole 416a.

The wiring auxiliary means 460 is configured in the shape of a bottomed container from two members that are arranged correspondingly in the left-right direction. That is, the wiring auxiliary means 460 is arranged to face the right side of the partition plate portion 442a and is fastened and fixed to the left side member 461, and the inner shape of the left side member 461 is arranged to face the right side of the left side member 461. and a right member 468 that is fastened and fixed to the left member 461 and has a shape that can cover when viewed in the left-right direction.

The left member 461 is fastened and fixed to a portion raised rightward at the front and rear positions of the partition plate portion 442a. a band-shaped extension portion 463 extending rightward from the opposite plate 462, a support column portion 464 projecting rightward in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the opposing plate 462 and having a female screw formed at the projecting tip; A wire support portion 465 is mainly provided on the obliquely upper rear side of the support column portion 464 and has a shape that allows insertion of a small-diameter member such as a binding band that supports the electric wire DK1.

As described above, the opposing plate 462 is fastened and fixed to the raised portion of the partition plate portion 442a. A gap is formed between the portion 442a and the portion 442a. This gap functions as a gap for passing the electric wiring DK1.

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) passes through the opening 442e, through the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the wiring auxiliary means 460, and through the wiring support portion 465, although the details will be described later. Then, it is supported by the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500 while passing from the back side to the bottom side of the support column portion 464 and facing upward from the front side of the support column portion 464 .

Therefore, the electric wiring DK1 must have a length (extra length) that can accommodate the vertical movement of the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500. is placed in the lowered position, it is accommodated in the auxiliary wiring means 460 while being loosely wound around the support column portion 464 .

Here, in this embodiment, the shape of the wiring auxiliary means 460 is designed so that the load applied to the electric wiring DK1 loosely wound around the support column portion 464 is reduced. That is, when the electrical wiring DK1 is wound around the supporting column portion 464, the longer the length of the electrical wiring DK1 to be wound, the larger the maximum diameter of the electrical wiring DK1 around the supporting column portion 464. and the electrical wiring DK1 is short, there is a possibility that the electrical wiring DK1 will receive a load as a reaction force from the belt-shaped extension portion 463. The belt-like extension portions 463 are arranged at regular intervals.

In particular, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the lower extending portion 519 as a portion supporting the electrical wiring DK1 at a position close to the wiring auxiliary means 460 in the rotating unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the support column portion 464. be done. Therefore, the extra length of the electric wiring DK1 that remains when the supporting means 410 and the rotating unit 500 move to the lowered position is arranged mainly on the front side of the supporting column portion 464 .

Correspondingly, the belt-like extension part 463 is designed so that a larger internal space can be secured on the front side than the support column part 464 with the support column part 464 as a reference in the front-rear direction. In addition, the band-shaped extension part 463 has a functional curved surface 463a, which is a curved surface that displaces downward toward the front side, below the support column part 464 and whose center of curvature radius is arranged on the lower side. Prepare.

Due to its shape, the functional curved surface 463a can apply a diagonally upward forward load as a reaction force to the electric wiring DK1 arranged close to it. As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be easily gathered in the range on the front side with respect to the support column portion 464 as a reference.

In addition, since the functional curved surface 463a has a curved shape that protrudes toward the inner side of the wiring auxiliary means 460, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the drive motor 441. As shown in FIG. In other words, the curved shape of the functional curved surface 463a stabilizes the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1, and also allows the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the drive motor 441 to be arranged in a minimum space.

25 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 500. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating unit 500 includes a fixing means 510 which is fastened and fixed to the support means 410 (see FIG. 23) and formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a fixing means 510 fixed inside the fixing means 510. Both end fixing means 520 constituting the center of rotation, shaft forming means 530 fixed to the both end fixing means 520 and arranged inside the U shape of the fixing means 510, inside the U shape of the fixing means 510 and A rotating left lid portion 550 disposed on the left side of the shaft forming means 530, a rotating body 560 fastened and fixed to the rotating left lid portion 550 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, and fastened and fixed to the right side of the rotating body 560. and a rotating right lid portion 570 arranged inside the U-shaped fixing means 510 .

To explain the outline of the rotating unit 500, it is composed mainly of a rotating body 560 and a rotating part that rotates about a left-right axis, and a fixed part that mainly supports the rotating part, mainly a fixing means 510. FIG.

The rotating portion is composed of a rotating body 560, a left rotating plate 550, a motor gear 542 meshed with the left rotating plate 550, and a driven plate 575 of the right rotating lid portion 570. 510, both end fixing means 520, shaft forming means 530 excluding motor gear 542, and attitude fixing bush 571 of rotating right lid portion 570 constitute fixed portions.

The fixing means 510 includes a U-shaped metal plate 511 that is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front by bending a metal plate at right angles, and a U-shaped metal plate 511 that is arranged to face the left and right sides of the U-shaped metal plate 511 . It mainly comprises a right and left fixed cover 514 having a shape capable of forming a closed cross section with the plate 511, and a guide member 516 which is fastened and fixed from below the U-shaped metal plate 511 and guides the electric wiring DK1. .

In the description of the left and right fixed lids 514, the term “closed cross section” does not imply complete sealing (adherence), and may be any closing method suitable for the purpose of the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is passed through the closed cross section, so an opening (for example, an opening with a diameter smaller than the thickness of the electrical wiring DK1 or an opening that does not allow the electrical wiring DK1 to pass through) , an opening in which the direction of the opening width larger than the thickness of the electric wire DK1 is along the longitudinal direction of the electric wire DK1 so that the accommodation of the electric wire DK1 can be maintained. Details of the route of the electric wiring DK1 will be described later.

The U-shaped metal plate 511 has female screws and through-holes for positioning formed in appropriate places on the long plate-like portion, and is used for alignment with the left and right fixing lids 514 and the guide member 516 and fastening and fixing.

Both ends of the U-shaped metal plate 511 are arranged to face each other, and the right and left sides are notched in different shapes. That is, a substantially circular first opening 512 is formed on the left side, while a substantially gourd-shaped second opening 513 and a pair of circular holes 513a are formed on the right side.

The guide member 516 has a deformed hole 517 formed vertically in a substantially gourd shape at the center position in the left-right direction, and a U-shaped metal plate 511 on the right side of the deformed hole 517. It mainly comprises a bottom portion 518 and a downward extending portion 519 extending downward from the right rear end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518 .

The deformed hole 517 is located above the deformed hole 413 (see FIG. 23) and is formed with a size capable of guiding the electric wiring DK1. The electric wiring DK1 passing upward through the deformed hole 517 is disposed between the lower bottom portion 518 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, bends upward, and connects between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514. It is arranged in between, is arranged on the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520 , and is arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511 . The state of the electric wiring DK1 in the path will be described later.

The downwardly extending portion 519 is configured in such a shape that the electrical wiring DK1 on the side that moves up and down corresponding to the up and down movement can be supported by a binding band. That is, the forming portion 411a is formed in a shape capable of fixing the binding band on the right side of the deformed hole 413 of the flat plate portion 411 . The electric wiring DK1 is fixed to the formation portion 411a by a binding band, and is fixed by a binding band to the lower extending portion 519 arranged on the rear side and below the formation portion 411a.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be moved toward the rear side, and thus the electric wiring DK1 is displaced toward the front side and sandwiched between the front upper edge portion of the belt-shaped extension portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414 of the support means 410. can be avoided (see FIG. 23).

Among the structures of the downwardly extending portion 519, the plate portion forming the right side surface functions as a restricting portion for preventing the binding band from rising. That is, the binding band is maintained in a state of being fixed to the U-shaped portion protruding downward at the lower end of the lower extension portion 519 , and by restricting the upward movement of the binding band, the electric power to the lower extension portion 519 is reduced. The fixed position of the wiring DK1 can be limited to the vicinity of the lower end portion of the downwardly extending portion 519 .

The both end fixing means 520 includes a left fixing bush 521 fitted into the first opening 512 of the U-shaped metal plate 511 from the left side, and a right fixing bush 522 fitted into the second opening 513 from the right side.

The left fixing bush 521 and the right fixing bush 522 are provided with forming portions (convex portions) that are fitted into notches (concave portions) formed above and below both the first opening 512 and the second opening 513. The posture is stabilized by , and positioning in the axial direction (horizontal direction) is performed by a flange-shaped portion having a larger diameter than the inner diameters of the first opening 512 and the second opening 513 .

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the left fixing bushing 521 and the right fixing bushing 522 are supported by the flange-like portions being arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixing lids 514, and are uneven. The posture is fixed by fitting.

The left fixed bushing 521 has a support hole 521a having a D-shaped cross section at the position of the rotation shaft. The support hole 521a is a portion that supports one end of the shaft forming means 530, the details of which will be described later.

The right fixing bush 522 has a pair of insertion holes 523 formed so that fastening screws can be inserted through the circular holes 513a, and a deformed annular shape that can be fitted into the second opening 513 and protrudes leftward. It mainly includes an annular protrusion 524 and an omission part 525 in which the formation of a flange-like part is omitted for the purpose of securing a passage path for the electrical wiring DK1 in the substantially lower half part.

The annular projection 524 is formed with a projection length exceeding the plate thickness of the U-shaped metal plate 511 . As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the attitude of the projecting fastening portion 532 of the shaft forming means 530, which will be described later in detail.

The shaft forming means 530 has a shaft right body portion 531 that is fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 523, and faces the left side of the shaft right body portion 531. A shaft left body portion 535 arranged and fastened and fixed to the shaft right body portion 531, a drive motor 541 fastened and fixed to the shaft left body portion 535, a motor gear 542 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 541, A decorative board 543 arranged on the front side of the shaft-right main body part 531 and the shaft-left main body part 535 is laminated on the front side of the decorative board 543, and a light diffusing shape is formed on the back surface of the shaft-right main body. Mainly includes a light diffusion plate 545 positioned by being sandwiched between the portion 531 and the shaft left body portion 535 from the front, back, left, right, top and bottom, and a photocoupler type detection sensor 547 fastened and fixed to the shaft right body portion 531 from the right side. .

As described above, the shaft configuration means 530 includes a plurality of components (ie, the drive motor 541, the illumination board 543, and the detection sensor 547) that need to be supplied with electricity. Therefore, it is considered that a compact arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 will be a problem. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all of the connection terminals 541a and 547a of the electrical wiring DK1 are arranged in the area between the shaft-right body portion 531 and the shaft-left body portion 535 facing each other.

That is, the connection terminal 541a of the drive motor 541 is arranged in the motor main body portion surrounded by the right shaft main body portion 531 and the left shaft main body portion 535, and the connection terminal (not shown) of the electric board 543 is provided. ) is arranged on the back side facing between the shaft-right main body portion 531 and the shaft-left main body portion 535, and the connection terminal 547a of the detection sensor 547 passes through the opening 533a of the shaft-right main body portion 531 and passes through the shaft-right main body portion 531. (axis left body portion 535 side).

As a result, as long as the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the area between the shaft-right main body portion 531 and the shaft-left main body portion 535, it is possible to supply electricity just enough. It can be accommodated in a region between the main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 (a region on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped wall extending toward the other side).

Further, fastening of the shaft forming means 530 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, fastening of the right shaft body portion 531 and the left shaft body portion 535, fastening of the left shaft body portion 535 and the driving motor 541, and fastening of the right shaft body portion 531 and the detection sensor 547 are unified in the horizontal direction (direction parallel to the rotation axis). Therefore, the radial dimension of the shaft configuring means 530 can be easily configured to be small.

In this way, the shaft forming means 530 allows not only the main functional parts to be integrated but also the electrical wiring DK1 to be stored compactly. Details of each configuration of the shaft configuration means 530 will be described below.

The shaft right body portion 531 includes a pair of front and rear projection fastening portions 532 that protrude rightward and have female threads formed at the ends of the projections, and a detection sensor 547 at a position below the projection fastening portions 532 . An opening 533a having a size through which the connection terminal 547a can be passed and which is drilled in the left-right direction, and a size through which the electrical wiring DK1 (and the connector arranged at the tip) can be inserted at a position above the projecting fastening portion 532. A wiring opening 533b drilled in the left-right direction, and a pair of locking claws 534 projecting like claws at positions spaced from the front side of the front plate portion of the shaft right body portion 531. Prepare for.

The protruding fastening portion 532 is loosely fitted to the annular protruding portion 524 of the right fixing bush 522 so that its posture is fixed. By screwing the inserted fastening screw, it is fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 . The projecting fastening portion 532 is inserted through the insertion hole 572 of the posture fixing bush 571, the details of which will be described later.

The locking claw portion 534 is a portion for supporting the electrical board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 so as to sandwich them from the left and right in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). In addition, by sandwiching (directly or indirectly) the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 between a pair of restricting protrusions 534a projecting toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the front plate portion, the vertical direction can be reduced. Displacement is configured to be regulated.

The left shaft body portion 535 includes a plate-like portion 536 that is formed in a plate-like shape that intersects the rotation shaft (horizontal direction axis) at right angles, and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rightward from the plate-like portion 536 at the protruding tip. A pair of protruding fastening portions 537 formed with female threads, a shaft support portion 538 projecting leftward along the rotation shaft from a plate-like portion 536 in a cylindrical shape, and a front plate portion of the left shaft body portion 535. It is mainly provided with a pair of locking claw portions 539 projecting like claws at positions spaced apart from each other on the front side.

The protruding fastening portion 537 protrudes up to the same plane as the plane on which the right end portion of the arc-shaped wall of the left shaft body portion 535 is arranged. In this case, the arc-shaped wall of the shaft left main body portion 535 and the protruding fastening portion 537 are arranged in the same plane with respect to the plate portion that is a constituent plate portion of the shaft right main body portion 531 and is arranged in parallel with the plate portion 536 . can be abutted.

As a result, the shaft-right main body portion 531 can be stably arranged with respect to the shaft-left main body portion 535, and the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole formed in the shaft-right main body portion 531 can be easily projected and fastened. Since it can be screwed into the female screw at the tip of the portion 537 , the shaft right body portion 531 can be easily fastened and fixed to the shaft left body portion 535 .

The shaft support portion 538 has a cylindrical shape with a slightly shorter diameter than the circular opening drilled in the center of the flanged gear 551 of the rotary left lid portion 550, so that the flanged gear 551 is rotatably shafted. support. In addition, the shaft support portion 538 is formed in a D shape whose tip is slightly smaller than the support hole 521a so that it can be fitted into the support hole 521a.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the shaft support portion 538 is non-rotatably supported by being fitted into the support hole 521a, and functions as a portion that rotatably supports the rotating left lid portion 550. As shown in FIG.

The locking claw portion 539 has substantially the same shape as the locking claw portion 534 of the shaft-right main body portion 531, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 are arranged from the left and right. Support it by pinching it. At this time, by sandwiching the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 between the front plate portion and the locking claw portions 534 and 539 which are arranged with a gap on the back side, displacement in the front-rear direction can also be restricted. .

In addition, by sandwiching (directly or indirectly) the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 between a pair of restricting protrusions 539a projecting toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the front plate portion, the vertical direction can be reduced. Regulates displacement.

As a result, even if separate fixing means (for example, fastening screws) are not prepared for fixing the illumination board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545, the shapes of the shaft right body portion 531 and the shaft left body portion 535 can be used. As a result, the illumination board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 can be fixed to the right shaft body portion 531 and the left shaft body portion 535 as the shaft right body portion 531 and the shaft left body portion 535 are fastened and fixed.

The electrical board 543 has a plurality of LED members 544 arranged vertically on the left end, and the LED members 544 are arranged so that their optical axes extend rightward along the surface of the electrical board 543. there is The plurality of LED members 544 are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to perform multi-color lighting effects with a small number of LEDs.

The light diffusing plate 545 has a light diffusing shape formed on the back surface, and this light diffusing shape is formed so that light can be emitted in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the light diffusing plate 545 . As a result, the number of LED members 544 can be reduced, and the rotating body 560 irradiated with the light transmitted through the light diffusion plate 545 can be illuminated evenly.

The detection sensor 547 is arranged inside the rotating body 560 on the right side opposite to the left side where the components for driving force transmission such as the drive motor 541 and the transmission gear 552 are arranged. As a result, the space inside the rotating body 560 can be effectively used, and the rotating body 560 can be arranged compactly.

By arranging the detection sensor 547 inside the rotor 560, the displacement of the detection sensor 547 accompanying the vertical displacement of the rotor 560 can be easily executed. In other words, when the detection sensor 547 is arranged outside the rotating body 560 , the member supporting the detecting sensor 547 is almost always arranged outside the rotating body 560 . In order to vertically displace the detection sensor 547 along with the vertical displacement, the member supporting the detection sensor 547 must also be displaced.

In contrast, when the detection sensor 547 is arranged inside the rotating body 560 as in the present embodiment, by arranging the detecting sensor 547 on a member constituting the rotation shaft of the rotating body 560, the rotating body The detection sensor 547 can be configured to be vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement of the sensor 560 (the vertical displacement of the member forming the rotation shaft).

The detection sensor 547 is disposed in such a posture that the detection groove faces the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating body 560 . As a result, the detected portion 577 protruding along the axial direction from the eccentric position of the rotor 560 can pass through the detection groove.

The rotating left lid portion 550 mainly includes a flanged gear 551 supported by the shaft support portion 538 and a driven plate 555 fixed to the flanged gear 551 in the rotational direction.

The flanged gear 551 includes a transmission gear 552 arranged so as to be able to mesh with the motor gear 542, and a stepped disc shape extending radially outward from the axial end of the transmission gear 552. The disk portion 553 and its stepped disk portion 553 project from specific positions on the outer circumference of the small diameter circle (in this embodiment, positions at intervals of 120 degrees that divide the circumference into three equal parts) toward the outer circumference of the large diameter circle. It mainly includes a plurality of projecting portions 554 provided.

The driven plate 555 has a deformed opening 556 formed in a slightly larger shape than the shape that continuously connects the small diameter circle of the stepped disk portion 553 and the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 when viewed in the rotation axis direction.

By fitting the deformed opening 556 to the small-diameter circle of the stepped disk portion 553 and the projecting portion 554 , it is possible to prevent displacement of the driven plate 555 with respect to the flanged gear 551 in the rotational direction.

In addition, since the large-diameter circle of the stepped disk portion 553 is larger than the deformed opening 556, the flanged gear 551 is restricted from penetrating the deformed opening 556 to the right.

The shape of the left side surface of the flanged gear 551 is such that when it is in contact with the projecting portion that is annularly projected to the right from the periphery of the support hole 521a of the left fixed bushing 521, it is in contact with the U-shaped metal plate 511. It is designed with a shape that leaves a gap in the

As a result, when the rotor 560 rotates, the left side surface of the flanged gear 551 can be configured to rub against only the annular protrusion of the left fixed bushing 521 . can avoid rubbing. Therefore, wear of the flanged gear 551 can be suppressed.

The rotating body 560 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes four plate-like members having different or same patterns or figures formed on the surfaces thereof. By being fastened and fixed, it constitutes a substantially cubic shape, the details of which will be described later.

The rotating right lid portion 570 is rotatably supported by an attitude fixing bush 571 having a pair of insertion holes 572 through which the projecting fastening portion 532 of the shaft forming means 530 can be inserted, and the attitude fixing bush 571. A driven plate 575 is mainly provided.

As with the stepped disk portion 553 of the flanged gear 551, the posture fixing bush 571 is configured such that the outer diameter of the outer peripheral surface is different. That is, the right end portion is configured to have a larger diameter than the left end portion, thereby defining the limit position when the driven plate 575 is displaced to the right with respect to the posture fixing bush 571 . As a result, the driven plate 575 can be prevented from coming off the posture fixing bush 571 .

The driven plate 575 has a shaft support hole 576 drilled in the central portion in a circular shape slightly larger than the small diameter circle of the posture fixing bush 571 , and a circular arc shape concentric with the central axis of the shaft support hole 576 . Detected portion 577 projecting leftward is mainly provided.

The driven plate 575 is disposed in a gap (see FIG. 30(a)) between the right end portion of the arc-shaped portion arranged on the right side of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the flange-shaped portion of the posture fixing bush 571. As a result, the displacement in the rotation axis direction (horizontal direction) is regulated.

In addition, since the driven plate 575 is supported so as to slide on the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter cylindrical portion of the posture fixing bush 571, it is more difficult to rotate than when it is supported by a small-diameter rotary shaft. Stabilization of posture can be achieved.

The detected portion 577 is arranged so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). The presence or absence of the detected portion 577 is detected by the detection sensor 547 (the posture of the detected portion 577 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 or the non-formation range of the detected portion 577 facing the detection sensor 547). The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can determine the attitude of the rotating body 560 by determining whether it is in the attitude of not entering the portion 577 .

27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating body 560, and FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body 560 and the rotating right lid portion 570. FIG. In FIG. 27, the facing surfaces of the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating body 560 are shown facing the front side, and in FIG. 28, the facing surfaces of the rotating right lid portion 570 and the rotating body 560 face the front side. is illustrated. That is, it is illustrated in an arrangement in which the front side is separated from the rear side of the facing surface.

Rotating body 560 is formed in a rectangular tubular shape by a plurality of (four in this embodiment) surface forming members 560a to 560d configured in a similar shape. As for the other surface forming members 560b to 560d, only differences will be described, and detailed description will be omitted.

The surface forming member 560a includes a substantially square plate-like portion 561 having a decorative pattern formed on its outer surface and constituting the outer wall of the rotating body 560, and a plate-like portion having a shape rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center point of the plate-like portion 561. A pair of symmetrical projecting portions 562 projecting inward from the left and right ends of 561 are provided.

The symmetrical protruding portions 562 are laminated on the inner side of the opposite plate portion 563 arranged to face the driven plate 555 or the driven plate 575 and formed to protrude outward from the opposite plate portion 563 in the front-rear direction. a left-right facing portion 564, a fastening auxiliary portion 565 that is laminated on the left and right inner sides of the left-right facing portion 564 to ensure a sufficient screw-in thickness, and an attitude matching portion 566 that is bored in the facing plate portion 563. .

The plate-like portion 561 has different decorative patterns on the surface constituent members 560a to 560d. As a result, the rotating body 560 rotates, and the surface constituting members 560a to 560d facing the player side change (periodically), so that a plurality of types of figures and patterns (in this embodiment, 4 types).

More specifically, the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface forming member 560a has a decorative pattern of a figure representing a triangle (triangle). (question mark) is formed on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the plane component 560c. On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the member 560d, a decorative pattern consisting of a figure indicating "o" (circle, circle) is formed.

In the compound action unit 402 in which four left and right units are arranged side by side (see FIG. 19), common decorative patterns are formed on the surface constituent members 560a, 560b, and 560d, while the surface constituent member 560c is formed with a common decorative pattern. Different decorative patterns are formed.

That is, on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the plane component 560c of the compound action unit 402 arranged on the leftmost side, a decorative pattern consisting of a figure indicating "H" is formed on the compound action unit 402 arranged second from the left end. On the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the plane forming member 560c of 402, a decorative pattern consisting of a figure indicating "I" is placed on the plate-like portion 561 of the plane forming member 560c of the compound action unit 402 which is arranged third from the left end. (exclamation mark ) are formed, and their uses will be described later.

The facing plate portion 563 has a center surface on the side of the rotating shaft formed in an arc shape forming a part of the same circle with the surface constituent members 560a to 560d, and one side of the front and rear ends (the front side of the surface constituent member 560a). ), and a concave portion 563b is formed on the other side (the rear side of the surface forming member 560a).

The concave portion 563b is formed in a shape that can be fitted in a state in which the convex portion 563a is rotated 90 degrees about the left-right direction axis. For example, in the concave portion 563b on the left side of the surface forming member 560a, there is a convex portion 563a on the lower side of the surface forming member 560b corresponding to the state rotated 90 degrees about the horizontal axis with respect to the surface forming member 560a. Mate. At the same time, the convex portion 563a on the left side of the surface forming member 560a is fitted with the concave portion 563b on the lower side of the surface forming member 560b.

The shapes of the convex portion 563a and the concave portion 563b can be arbitrarily set as long as the above conditions are satisfied. For example, it may have an angled shape, a semicircular shape, or an inclined shape. In the present embodiment, the projecting portion 563a is configured to have a size that enables formation of a female screw, thereby forming the projecting portion 563a as a portion for exhibiting the fastening force of the fastening screw.

In a similar manner, by fitting the adjacent surface forming members 560a to 560d together, it is possible to align them in a rectangular cylindrical shape. The left-right facing portion 564 prevents the surface forming members 560a to 560d from being displaced in the left-right direction.

That is, in a state in which the surface constituent members 560a to 560d form a rectangular cylindrical shape, the left and right opposing portions 564 abut against the recessed portions 563b of the adjacent surface constituent members 560a to 560d from the inside in the left and right direction (opposing arrangement). is done).

For example, with respect to the left-right facing portion 564 arranged on the front side of the surface forming member 560a, the concave portion 563b arranged on the lower side of the surface forming member 560d is continuous from the left side thereof (outside in the left-right direction of the rotating body 560). The right side abuts (is arranged to face each other). That is, after the rectangular tubular shape is configured, the horizontal position of the surface forming member 560d is aligned with the surface forming member 560a by displacing the surface forming member 560d to the right with respect to the surface forming member 560a. be able to.

In addition, a concave shape is arranged on the front side of the surface constituent member 560a from the right side (lateral direction outer side of the rotating body 560) with respect to the left and right facing portion 564 arranged on the lower side (lower right side) of the surface constituent member 560d. The left side surface continuous with the portion 563b abuts (is arranged to face each other). That is, after the rectangular tubular shape is configured, the horizontal position of the surface forming member 560d is aligned with the surface forming member 560a by displacing the surface forming member 560d to the right with respect to the surface forming member 560a. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the symmetrical projecting portion 562 is rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center point of the plate-like portion 561, so that one adjacent surface constituting member (for example, a surface constituting member 560a), by displacing another surface constituting member (for example, the surface constituting member 560d) in one lateral direction, the left and right positions of the other surface constituting member can be aligned with respect to one surface constituting member.

The posture matching portions 566 are formed as posture matching portions 566a to 566d in the surface constituent members 560a to 560d, respectively, and configured as through holes having different shapes in the respective surface constituent members 560a to 560d.

That is, the posture matching portion 566a formed on the surface forming member 560a is formed to have a circular cross section, and the posture matching portion 566b formed on the surface forming member 560b is short in the direction along which the plate portion 561 extends. A posture matching portion 566c formed in the surface forming member 560c having a rectangular shape is formed in a rectangular shape having a longer direction along the extending direction of the plate-like portion 561 and formed in the surface forming member 560d. The portion 566d is perforated with an equilateral triangular cross section.

The driven plate 555 has a plurality of fitting protrusions 555a to 555d projecting in shapes corresponding to the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d from positions where they can be inserted into the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d.

That is, the pair of fitting projections 555a are projected with a circular cross section, and the pair of fitting projections 555b are projected into a rectangular shape with short sides along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 555. The fitting projection 555c projects in a rectangular shape having long sides along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 555, and the pair of fitting projections 555d projects in an equilateral triangular cross section.

The driven plate 575 has a plurality of fitting protrusions 575a to 575d projecting in shapes corresponding to the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d from positions where they can be inserted into the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d.

That is, the pair of fitting projections 575a project with a circular cross section, and the pair of fitting projections 575b project with a rectangular shape having short sides along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 575. The fitting projection 575c projects in a rectangular shape having long sides along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 575, and the pair of fitting projections 575d projects in an equilateral triangular cross section.

In this way, by configuring the attitude matching portions 566a to 566d, the fitting convex portions 555a to 555d, and the fitting convex portions 575a to 575d in corresponding shapes, the rotating left lid portion can be rotated in a state where the relative angle is appropriate. 550, rotating body 560, and rotating right lid portion 570 can be fitted together and fastened and fixed.

Incidentally, as an actual assembly procedure, all four surface forming members 560a to 560d of the rotating body 560 are assembled, fitted into a rectangular cylinder shape, and left and right positions are aligned. The portions 555a to 555d are fitted to the posture matching portions 566a to 566d of the rotating body 560, and the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes formed at the four corners are screwed into the female threads of the convex portion 563a, thereby rotating the rotating body. 560 and the rotating left lid portion 550 can be fastened and fixed. Next, by screwing in the fastening screw in the same procedure, the rotating right lid portion 570 can also be fastened and fixed to the rotating body 560 .

In the present embodiment, both the direction of engagement and the direction of fastening and fixing of the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating right lid portion 570 with respect to the posture matching portions 566a to 566d of the rotating body 560 are in the left-right direction (direction parallel to the rotation axis). is designed to be

As a result, the fastening screws can be removed from the outer surface (display surface) of each of the surface forming members 560a to 560d of the rotating body 560, so that the fastening screws can be prevented from being visually recognized on the display surface. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a seal member for hiding the fastening screws, and to form a decorative pattern using the entire area (entire area) of the outer surface (display surface) of each of the surface constituent members 560a to 560d. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size (area, ie, density) of the decorative pattern with respect to the size (area) of each of the constituent members 560a to 560d.

Here, for example, even if one surface constituent member (for example, the surface constituent member 560a) is fastened and fixed to the rotating left lid portion 550 and then another surface constituent member (for example, the surface constituent member 560d) is attached, , the fitting convex portion 555d of the rotating left lid portion 550 fastened and fixed to one surface constituting member 560a interferes with the opposing plate portion 563 of the other surface constituting member 560d. Therefore, the concave portion 563b of the other surface forming member 560d cannot be slid between the left-right facing portion 564 of the one surface forming member 560a and the driven plate 555, and assembly cannot be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating right lid portion 570 can be fastened and fixed only after all the surface forming members 560a to 560d are assembled into a rectangular cylinder. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembling errors (for example, assembling in a state where any one of the surface forming members 560a to 560d is insufficient).

That is, in the present embodiment, the fitting protrusions 555a to 555d and 575a to 575d have the effect of enhancing the rigidity of the rotating left lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 by fitting, By matching the shape with the posture matching portions 566a to 566d, the left rotating lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the right rotating lid portion 570 can be assembled in an appropriate posture. At the same time, it is possible to achieve the effect of preventing forgetting to assemble the members 560a to 560d.

29(a) and 29(b) are exploded front perspective views of the compound action unit 402 of the first action unit 400. FIG. 29(a) and 29(b) show perspective views from different directions, and the rotating unit 500 is arranged with the lower surface facing the front side.

The annular protrusion 412 is a C-shaped protrusion having a split portion 412a (cut) on the right side, and an overhang-shaped portion 516a corresponding to the split portion 412a is formed on the lower surface of the guide member 516. .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the attitude of the rotation unit 500 with respect to the support means 410 is defined by arranging the protruding portion 516a on the dividing portion 412a. With the posture of the rotation unit 500 defined, the guide member 516 is fastened and fixed to the support means 410 by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 413a into the fastening portion 517a formed with the female screw. be.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the deformed hole 413 and the deformed hole 517 communicate with each other as the passage of the electrical wiring DK1, but differ in the internal shape forming the outer frame of the passage. This difference in shape corresponds to a difference in the form of the electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 21) guided from the irregular-shaped hole 413 or the irregular-shaped hole 517. FIG.

More specifically, the electrical wiring DK1 is vertically displaced below the deformed hole 413 as the support means 410 moves up and down. are always fixed. Therefore, it is preferable that the portion below the odd-shaped hole 413 is adapted to the vertical displacement, and the portion above the deformed hole 517 is preferably adapted to the path for fixing the electrical wiring DK1. Hereinafter, aspects of the electric wiring DK1 of the present embodiment from this viewpoint will be described.

In this embodiment, below the deformed hole 413, the electrical wiring DK1 composed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires is a tubular member formed of a flexible resin material with a helical cut (so-called It is configured as a wire bundle with a cross section that is close to circular by being bundled with a spiral tube).

In this embodiment, the spiral tube is wound at least in the range of the electric wiring DK1 that can enter (enter and exit) the wiring auxiliary means 460 .

Since the electrical wiring DK1 is configured as a wire bundle having a cross section close to circular, even if the electrical wiring DK1 is bent in any direction as the support means 410 moves up and down, resistance to the bending of the electrical wiring DK1 and It can be configured so that a large difference does not occur in the load applied due to bending.

The deformed hole 413 has a lateral width shorter than that of the deformed hole 517 so that the electric wire DK1 can be easily arranged into a wire bundle having a nearly circular cross section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 from arranging so as to spread in the front-rear direction. When the DK1 is guided rightward through the deformed hole 413 and fixed at the forming portion 411a by a fixing member such as a binding band, it is possible to easily form a wire bundle having a short front-to-rear width and a substantially circular cross section.

It should be noted that the cross-sectional shape of the electric wire bundle of the electrical wiring DK1 does not have to be circular, and various forms are exemplified. For example, as the number of electric wires constituting the electrical wiring DK1 increases, the cross section of the electric wire bundle tends to be elongated in the left and right direction and has an elliptical shape. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the resistance and load when bending in the front-rear direction. The bending in the front-rear direction is a form of bending that tends to occur in this embodiment, and the details will be described later.

FIG. 30(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the configuration of a portion of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30(b) is a perspective view schematically showing a harness that constitutes the electrical wiring DK1. As shown in FIG. 30(b), the electrical wiring DK1 has a configuration in which a plurality of coated flexible electric wires are connected and fixed to a connector as a connection end portion at approximately equal intervals.

In the rotation unit 500 of this embodiment, connectors are connected to the drive motor 541, the detection sensor 547, and the electrical board 543, respectively, and the total number of electric wires extending from each connector is 16.

In FIG. 30(a), of the rotating unit 500, a U-shaped metal plate 511, a right left and right fixing lid 514, a guide member 516, both end fixing means 520, a right shaft body portion 531, and a left shaft body A portion 535, a drive motor 541, a detection sensor 547, and an attitude fixing bush 571 are illustrated, and the left and right fixed lid 514 and the guide member 516 are illustrated with a space from the U-shaped metal plate 511, and are left and right fixed. Only lid 514 is shown in a different view.

In FIG. 30(a), mainly the guidance of the electrical wiring DK1 to the rotating unit 500 will be described. The electric wire DK1 passing upward through the deformed hole 517 is passed through a gap between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518, which has a long front-to-rear width and a short vertical width. , preferably arranged in a row in front and behind rather than stacked one on top of the other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide member 516 is formed at the right end portion of the deformed hole 517 so as to be one step lower than the lower bottom portion 518 in a fan shape as viewed from above, and the plurality of electric wires constituting the electrical wiring DK1 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b is provided for adjusting the degree of spread to the outside. The function of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31(a) is a top view of the guide member 516, and FIG. 31(b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 along the line XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31(a), and FIG. 31(e) is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electrical wiring DK1 taken along line XXXIe-XXXIe of FIG. 31(d).

In FIGS. 31(a) and 31(d), a part of the route of each electric wire of the electrical wiring DK1 guided through the deformed hole 517 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines. 31(c) and 31(e) show an example of the arrangement of the wires of the electrical wiring DK1.

That is, each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 has a lower corner portion having two sides formed by the deformed hole 517 and the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b, and a corner portion disposed on the right side of the lower corner portion, which is the lowered bottom portion 518 and the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b. is curved so as to be placed close to (contact with) the upper corners forming two surfaces, and in this state, dispersion (spreading) in the front-rear direction is regulated by the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b (Fig. 31 (a) and FIG. 31(c)).

In other words, the degree of dispersion of the electrical wiring DK1 can be adjusted by adjusting the forming angle of the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the extension line 517x linearly extended from the end of the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b in top view is adjusted to be a straight line reaching the corner of the lowered bottom portion 518. Front and rear wall portions of the portion 517b are formed.

As a result, the degree of distribution of the electrical wiring DK1 is maximized while the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged on one plane (the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518) above the deformed hole 517. be able to. That is, in the vicinity of the right end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518, the electric wires of the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily distributed across the front-to-rear width of the lowered bottom portion 518 (see FIG. 31(b)).

In the present embodiment, the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b is designed such that the front-to-rear spacing at the left end is approximately 6.4 [mm], and the front and rear inclined walls have an inclination angle of 35 degrees (central angle of 70 degrees) with respect to the left-right direction. be.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 extends from the right end portion of the lower bottom portion 518 to the central portion of the fastening portion 516b. can be arranged in a state in which each electric wire is in contact with the That is, the dimension required for each electric wire having an outer diameter (about 0.7 [mm] in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the same plane (about 11.2 [mm] for 16 wires in this embodiment) ]), the front-to-rear width (in this embodiment, about 15.4 [mm]) is ensured.

As a result, even if the depth of the lowered bottom portion 518 (the gap dimension between the lower surface of the U-shaped metal plate 511) is designed to be small (approximately 2 [mm] in this embodiment), It is possible to easily prevent a compressive load from being applied to the electric wiring DK1 from the component to be assembled.

Various modes are exemplified for the shape of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b. For example, if the front-to-rear width is large compared to the shape of the present embodiment, each electric wire of the electrical wiring DK1 can be lowered from near the left-right central portion of the lower bottom portion 518 and widened to the front-to-rear width of the bottom portion 518. can be widened, there is an advantage that the load applied to the wires from the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b can be reduced even when the number of wires is large. There is also the drawback that the wire may bend (bend) in the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lowered bottom 518 .

Further, for example, when the front-to-rear width is smaller than that of the shape of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the electric wire bending (bending) on the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518 . On the other hand, there is a disadvantage that the load applied to the wires from the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b tends to increase when the number of wires is large because the width of the path through which the wires pass is narrow.

Therefore, the shape of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b in the present embodiment has the advantage of reducing the possibility of the electric wire bending (bending) on the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518 (electric wiring DK1 can be lowered along a horizontal straight line to reach the right end of the bottom portion 518), and at the same time, the width of the wire passage path can be secured as wide as possible. I can say.

The extension line 517x serves as a guideline for the arrangement range of each electric wire of the electrical wiring DK1, and mainly serves as a guideline for the outer edge of the arrangement, and is configured to intersect with the deformed hole 517 on the right side of the center. In other words, the extension line 517x intersects on the right side of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of upper and lower fastening portions 517a.

As a result, the position where the wires of the electrical wiring DK1 are gathered on the lower side of the deformed hole 517 can be arranged to the right of the center of the deformed hole 517 (see FIG. 31(e)). Therefore, as schematically shown in FIG. 31(d), even if the electric wiring DK1 passes through only the right-side range of the deformed hole 517 due to the arrangement of the forming portion 411a, each electric wire is sufficiently The electric wiring DK1 can be guided to the formation portion 411a (see FIG. 23) in a state of being gathered into one.

In this manner, the deformed hole 517 is formed in a shape capable of supporting the change when the degree (state) of dispersion of the electric wiring DK1 changes between before and after passing. Therefore, compared to the case where the degree (state) of distribution of the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 changes rapidly, the possibility of each electric wire bending can be reduced, and the load applied to the electric wiring DK1 can be reduced. be able to.

The guide member 516 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 516b each composed of a positioning pin used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511 and insertion holes for inserting fastening screws fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511. there is

Since the fastening portion 516b is also arranged in the lowered bottom portion 518 where the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged, the arrangement area of the electrical wiring DK1 is somewhat limited, but in this embodiment, the arrangement is made to minimize this limitation. devising.

First, by arranging a plurality of fastening portions 516b on the opposite side (left side) of the lowered bottom portion 518 as a position that does not interfere with the electric wiring DK1, and securing the fastening force, the number of fastening portions 516b arranged in the lowered bottom portion 518 is minimized. is kept to

Note that the fastening portion 516b may not be arranged on the lower bottom portion 518, but in that case, the weight of the electrical wiring DK1 fixed to the downwardly extending portion 519 and the vibration and load generated when the rotating unit 500 moves up and down may , the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518 may be misaligned. In order to avoid this, the guide member 516 may be made thicker, but in that case, the thickness of the guide member 516 in the front view becomes large, and the rotating body 560 becomes difficult to stand out, which is undesirable in terms of performance. Profit is made.

That is, in this embodiment, by arranging the minimum number of fastening portions 516b in the lower bottom portion 518, the guide member 516 can be configured to be thin while maintaining the effect of securing the arrangement width of the electrical wiring DK1. , the effect of enhancing the presence of the rotating body 560 when viewed from the front can be obtained.

Further, by setting the fastening portion 516b on the side to be left to the fastening portion 516b on the far side from the right end portion of the lower bottom portion 518, it is possible to minimize the extent to which the width of the electrical wiring DK1 is reduced.

The fastening portion 516b arranged on the lower bottom portion 518 is provided with a positioning pin 516c like the fastening portion 516b arranged on the left side of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30(a)), but the positioning pin 516c has already been fastened. It is arranged at a location where the electric wiring DK1 cannot be arranged by the portion 516b. That is, it is arranged on a straight line drawn from the deformed hole 517 and overlapping with the fastening portion 516b and at a position on the opposite side of the deformed hole 517 with the fastening portion 516b as a reference.

This can prevent the positioning pin 516c from narrowing the arrangement range (arrangement width) of the electric wiring DK1, so that the positioning pin 516c facilitates the arrangement of the guide member 516 when assembling it to the U-shaped metal plate 511. The wiring range (arrangement width) of the electric wiring DK1 can be ensured while ensuring the performance.

Returning to FIG. 30(a), description will be made. The electric wiring DK1 reaching the right end of the lower bottom portion 518 is curved upward along the plate left surface of the right and left fixed lid 514, and then arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the right and left fixed lid 514. be done.

The left and right fixed lids 514 are formed in the shape of a flat plate, and extend along the outer shape of the body plate portion 514a to a position facing the front and rear upper and lower surfaces of the U-shaped metal plate 511. An extended frame portion 514b and a space securing portion 514c formed so as to fill a corner formed by the extended frame portion 514b and the main body plate portion 514a and recessed toward the main body plate portion 514a from the extended frame portion 514b. , a positioning pin formed in a part of the space securing portion 514c and used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511, and an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511. It mainly includes a fastening portion 514d and jig holes 514e drilled in the body plate portion 514a at front and rear positions of the fastening portion 514b.

The space securing portion 514c is formed at a position where it abuts on the U-shaped metal plate 511 in the left-right direction. The electric wiring DK1 is laid in the gap between the .

The fastening portion 514d is arranged on the front side, like the fastening portion 516b arranged on the lower bottom portion 518 . As a result, a range in which the electrical wiring DK1 is continuously arranged from the lower bottom portion 518 to the left and right fixed lids 514 can be ensured on the rear side.

Here, by arranging the fastening portions 514d and 516b on the front side, it is possible to reduce the degree of decrease in performance performance due to loosening of fastening screws. For example, when the fastening portions 514d and 516b are arranged on the rear side, the front side portion, which is easily visually recognized by the player, becomes large in displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 when the fastening screw is loosened. It may lead to deterioration of performance.

On the other hand, when the fastening screws of the fastening portions 514d and 516b arranged on the front side are loosened, the displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 is large in the rear portion where the fastening screws are not arranged. Since the rear portion is a portion that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is difficult for the player to notice the loosening of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of deterioration in performance performance.

In addition, since the positioning pins of the fastening portion 514d are arranged to overlap above and below the insertion hole (in the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring DK1), the extent to which the insertion hole and the positioning pin narrow the arrangement range of the electrical wiring DK1 is minimized. can be reduced to

In the jig hole 514e, when the left and right fixing lids 514 are assembled to the U-shaped metal plate 511, the electrical wiring DK1 is caught (collapsed) between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the space securing portion 514c. This is an opening for inserting from the outside a jig (not shown) for adjusting the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 in order to avoid this.

From this point of view, the jig hole 514e becomes unnecessary after the assembly work is completed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the jig holes 514e are formed at the left and right positions where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the jig holes 514e, it is possible to prevent the production effect from deteriorating due to the jig holes 514e being visually recognized by the player. can be prevented.

The electric wiring DK1 arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixing lids 514 passes through the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520 and is arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. be. Electrical wires of the electrical wiring DK1 arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511 are connected to the drive motor 541, the electrical board 543, and the detection sensor 547, so that electricity can be supplied.

Here, the electrical wiring DK1 passes not only inside the right fixing bush 522 but also inside the right shaft body portion 531 , the left shaft body portion 535 and the posture fixing bush 571 . As a result, the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with the rotating portion of the rotating unit 500 (the rotating body 560, the left rotating plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the left rotating plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the right rotating lid portion 570). can be physically prevented.

The electric wiring DK1 passes through the inner side of the right shaft body portion 531, which is arranged on the right side of the left shaft body portion 535 to which the drive motor 541 is fastened and fixed, and extends inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. A position on the opposite side of the drive motor 541 with respect to the projecting fastening portion 537 , that is, the projecting fastening portion 537 and an arc-shaped extension extending rightward along the outer shape of the shaft left body portion 535 . It is arranged between the setting portion 535a.

As a result, the electrical wiring DK1 can be arranged away from the drive motor 541, so that the electrical wiring DK1 can be prevented from becoming hot and damaged by the heat generated by the drive motor 541. FIG. Further, this effect is produced by routing the electrical wiring DK1 to the protruding fastening portion 537 as the fastening portion, without adding a separate exclusive member for arranging the electrical wiring DK1 apart from the drive motor 541. product cost can be reduced.

The vertical movement of the compound action unit 402 of the first action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34 . FIGS. 32 to 34 show the first operation unit 400 moving up and down in chronological order. That is, FIG. 32 shows a state in which the rotation unit 500 is arranged at the lowered position, FIG. 33 shows a state in which the rotation unit 500 is arranged at an intermediate position of the vertical movement width, and FIG. 500 is shown in the raised position.

32(a) is a left side view of the compound action unit 402, FIG. 32(b) is a front view of the compound action unit 402, and FIG. 32(c) is a right side view of the compound action unit 402. is. In addition, in FIG. 32(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the rear side of the metal plate portion 432 is shown through, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown in imaginary lines. , the illustration of the right member 468 is omitted.

33(a) is a left side view of the compound action unit 402, FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the compound action unit 402, and FIG. 33(c) is a right side view of the compound action unit 402. It is a plan view. In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 33(a) shows the rear side through the metal plate portion 432, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown by imaginary lines. , the illustration of the right member 468 is omitted.

34(a) is a left side view of the compound action unit 402, FIG. 34(b) is a front view of the compound action unit 402, and FIG. 34(c) is a right side view of the compound action unit 402. It is a plan view. In addition, in FIG. 34(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the metal plate portion 432 is shown through and the rear side is shown, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown by imaginary lines, and FIG. , the illustration of the right member 468 is omitted.

First, the operation of the transmission means 450 by the drive means 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(a), 33(a) and 34(a). When the drive gear 441a rotates with the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 of the drive means 440, the transmission gear 451 meshing with the drive gear 441a, the intermediate gear 452 meshed with the transmission gear 451, and the intermediate gear 452 mesh with the transmission gear 451. The rotating arm member 453, in which the gear portion 453a is meshed with the intermediate gear 452, rotates simultaneously.

When the drive gear 441a is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating arm member 453 rotates counterclockwise as seen from the left side, and as shown in FIG. The member 442 is stopped at a position where it abuts on the rotation restricting portion 442f extending leftward from the upper end portion of the partition plate portion 442a.

Conversely, when the drive gear 441a is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the left side from the state shown in FIG. By inserting the plate portion 453d to be detected through the detection sensor 442d, it is detected that the rotating arm member 453 is positioned at the rotation end position (see FIG. 32(a)), and the driving of the drive motor 441 is started. Stop controlled.

At the terminal position of this operation, the connecting member 454 connected to the rotating distal end of the rotating arm member 453 is positioned between the inner wall of the long through-hole 416a of the supporting means 410 and the lateral direction (displacement of the supporting means 410 is allowed). Since the rotation of the rotating arm member 453 is restricted by abutting in the direction perpendicular to the direction), it is not necessary to intentionally provide an additional abutting portion (for example, a portion corresponding to the rotation restricting portion 442f). not.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a), 33(a), and 34(a), the plate portion 453d to be detected is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453. The sensor 442d is oriented so that the detection groove overlaps the arc, and the base end side portion of the detection groove is arranged radially outward with respect to the arc.

As a result, the plate portion 453d to be detected can be detected by the detection sensor 442d, and even when the rotating arm member 453 rotates beyond the rotation end position (the position of FIG. 32(a)), the detection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the detected plate portion 453d from colliding with the base end side portion of the detection groove of the sensor 442d.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the rotation unit 500 is in the raised position, the fastening screw insertion hole of the end plate member 421 is arranged inside the notch of the metal plate portion 432, so the fastening screw is turned with a screwdriver. be able to.

That is, by arranging the rotating unit 500 in the raised position during assembly, the stacking means 420 and the supporting means 410 can be fixed. An operation to release the fixation between the stacking means 420 and the supporting means 410 can be performed.

The assembly order of the compound motion unit 402 of the first motion unit 400 and the rotation unit 500 will be described. 23, 24, 25, 26, 30(a) and 31 will be referred to as necessary in the explanation of the assembly order.

First, the rotating unit 500 is assembled. At that time, each component of the shaft forming means 530 is assembled and integrated with one end of the electrical wiring DK1 corresponding to the drive motor 541, the electrical board 543 and the detection sensor 547 being connected. At this time, the other end of the electrical wiring DK1 is exposed outside through the wiring opening 533b (see FIGS. 25 and 30(a)).

Next, the rotating left lid portion 550 , the rotating body 560 and the rotating right lid portion 570 are assembled and integrated with the shaft forming means 530 . At this time, the other end of the electrical wiring DK1 is passed through the opening in the center of the posture fixing bush 571 and is protruded outside (see FIGS. 25 and 30(a)).

The distance between the left surface of the flanged gear 551 and the right surface of the posture fixing bush 571 is the It is configured to be slightly shorter than the distance between the plate portions opposed to each other as the tip portion.

Therefore, an assembly in which the rotating left cover portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right cover portion 570 are integrated can be arranged between the plate portions facing each other as the distal end portion of the U-shaped metal plate 511. FIG. At this time, the projecting fastening portion 532 is arranged in alignment with the position of the circular hole 513a.

Next, both end fixing means 520 are fitted from the left and right outer sides of the U-shaped metal plate 511 . At this time, the other end of the electric wire DK1 is passed through the center opening of the right fixing bush 522 and is led out (see FIG. 30(a)).

Both end fixing means 520 and U-shaped metal plate 511 are shaped so that rotation of both end fixing means 520 with respect to U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (for example, concave-convex fitting). The shape of the means 530 is a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the both end fixing means 520 (for example, fitting with a D-shaped cross section). Therefore, the rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (see FIG. 25).

By inserting a fastening screw through the insertion hole 523 and screwing the fastening screw into the projecting fastening portion 532 , the shaft forming means 530 can be fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 . As a result, the U-shaped metal plate 511, the both end fixing means 520, the shaft forming means 530, the rotating left lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 can be integrated. Note that the left fixing bush 521 of the both end fixing means 520 is retained by the left and right fixing lids 514, and the installation of fastening screws is omitted.

Next, the right and left fixing lid 514 and the guide member 516 are fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 . At this time, the other end of the electric wiring DK1 is protruded downward through the deformed hole 517 of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30(a)).

In order to narrow the gap between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514, a plurality of electrical wirings DK1 arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514 are arranged. It is preferable to disperse the wires in the front and rear (see FIG. 31(b)).

In the assembling work of the present embodiment, a special jig (bar-shaped, string-shaped, or specially-shaped jig) is inserted through the jig hole 514e to adjust the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 while the left and right fixing lids 514 are being opened. It can be attached to the U-shaped metal plate 511 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of the assembly process while distributing the plurality of electric wires that constitute the electric wiring DK1.

When the guide member 516 is fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511, the electric wire DK1 is pulled downward while the guide member 516 is attached to the U-shaped metal plate 511, so that the electric wire DK1 naturally extends into the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. (see FIG. 31(c)). This makes it possible to reduce the difficulty of the assembly process while arranging the electric wiring DK1 at an appropriate position.

When the rotating unit 500 integrally assembled by the above procedure is assembled to the support means 410, it should be noted that the other end side of the electric wiring DK1 is projected downward through the deformed hole 413. FIG. A spiral tube is wound around the electrical wiring DK1 protruding from the deformed hole 413 .

Of the composite operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400, the configuration other than the wiring auxiliary means 460 can be assembled separately from the rotation unit 500. After fixing the rotation unit 500 to the support means 410 in this state, the other end side of the electric wiring DK1 is fixedly arranged.

That is, the electric wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band inserted through the forming portion 411a of the support means 410, and fixed to the lower extending portion 519 of the guide member 516 in the same manner. It is passed under the support column portion 464, fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band inserted through the wire support portion 465, and passed through the opening 442e of the split base member 442 to the rear side (see FIG. 23).

By fastening and fixing the left side member 461 to the divided base member 442 with the electric wiring DK1 passing through the opening 442e, the electric wiring DK1 can be arranged in the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left side member 461. . According to this assembling method, compared to the case where the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is determined with the left member 461 fixed to the split base member 442, the electric wiring DK1 can be inserted into a gap narrower than the size of the connector at the tip of the electric wiring DK1. can be arranged, the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left member 461 can be designed to be narrow.

After that, by fastening and fixing the right member 468 to the left member 461, the assembly of the compound motion unit 402 of the first motion unit 400 can be completed. In this way, according to the present embodiment in which the auxiliary wiring means 460 is not formed as a single piece but is formed separately into the left member 461 and the right member 468, the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged inside the auxiliary wiring means 460. workability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 32(b), 32(c), 33(b), 33(c), 34(b) and 34(c), the wiring assisting means 460 and the electric wiring The relationship between DK1, the support means 410 for supporting the electrical wiring DK1, and the guide member 516 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the lowered position of the rotary unit 500, the front hanging portion 414 of the support means 410 abuts against the upper end portion of the left member 461 of the auxiliary wiring means 460 and is supported therefrom. That is, the wiring auxiliary means 460 also functions as means for supporting the rotating unit 500 .

In other words, only the left side of the rotating unit 500 is supported by the stacking means 420 and the guiding means 430 (see FIG. 23). Both sides can support the rotating unit 500 .

As a result, the upper limit value of the rotation speed of the rotating body 560 when the wobble of the rotating unit 500 is within the allowable range can be set to (positioned in the raised position).

As shown in FIG. 32( c ), in the lowered position of the rotary unit 500 , the lower end of the front hanging portion 414 abuts on the front upper end of the strip-shaped extended portion 463 of the wiring assisting means 460 . As a result, the upper opening of the wiring assisting means 460 can be shielded from the line of sight of the player (viewed obliquely downward). As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK1 housed in the wiring auxiliary means 460 from being seen by the player when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at the lowered position.

The electric wiring DK1 is fixed to the forming portion 411a (see FIG. 23) with a fixing member such as a binding band, and is fixed to the lower end portion of the downward extending portion 519 with a fixing member such as a binding band below it, and hangs down. The part is supported (accommodated) inside the wiring aid 460 .

The length of the electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 32(c)) accommodated inside the wiring auxiliary means 460 is the length of the belt-shaped extension portion 463 and the support column portion 464 when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at the raised position. It is designed to be long enough to float the portion placed between them (see FIG. 34(c)).

Further, the shape of the band-shaped extension portion 463 is designed to have a length such that the electrical wiring DK1 arranged in a substantially arc shape on the front side of the functional curved surface 463a reaches the lower extension portion 519 without excessive slack. (See FIG. 32(a)).

By designing the electric wiring DK1 with a sufficient length so as not to place a burden on the electric wiring DK1, the electric wiring DK1 can be arranged inside the wiring auxiliary means 460 with a margin. In addition, since the electrical wiring DK1 reaches the lower extending portion 519 without excessive slack, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DK1 from being caught between the belt-shaped extending portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414. be able to.

A spiral tube (not shown) wound around the electrical wiring DK1 is made of flexible silicon resin, but due to its shape, it has a slightly higher rigidity than the electrical wiring. Therefore, variations in displacement of the electric wiring DK1 due to the vertical movement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the electrical wiring DK1 can be supported by the rigidity of the spiral tube (the electrical wiring DK1 can be supported by the spiral tube), the electrical wiring DK1 is suspended between the wiring support portion 465 and the downward extending portion 519. Even in a state where the electrical wiring DK1 is in a state where the electrical wiring DK1 is suspended, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DK1 from sagging under its own weight, so that the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 can be stabilized.

The electric wiring DK1 supported inside the wiring assisting means 460 is fixed to the wiring support portion 465 with a fixing member such as a binding band, passes between the left member 461 and the partition plate portion 442a, and is guided rearward from the opening 442e. (See FIG. 23). That is, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is supported and suspended by the downwardly extending portion 519 and the wiring support portion 465 .

Of the downward extending portion 519 and the wire supporting portion 465, the wire supporting portion 465 is fixed, and the downward extending portion 519 is configured to be vertically movable. Since the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is likely to vary, the lower extending portion 519 side (front side) is configured to secure a larger space above the strip-shaped extending portion 463 .

Specifically, the shape of the front side is lower than the shape of the back side, and the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged by forming an arc shape with the center inside (above) the wiring auxiliary means 460. It has as much space as possible.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the rotating arm member 453 is arranged on the left side of the combined action unit 402, the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged on the right side of the combined action unit 402, and the arrangement range of each is the partition plate portion 442a. separated by

Here, the partition plate portion 442a is an essential component as a portion that supports the drive motor 441 and the transmission means 450. As shown in FIG. That is, the arrangement range of the rotating arm member 453 and the electrical wiring DK1 can be divided without adding a dedicated member, so that the rotating arm member 453 and the electrical wiring DK1 can be separated from each other while reducing the material cost. interference can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the rotating unit 500 is in the raised position, the extending direction of the extending arm portion 453b of the rotating arm member 453 is the vertical direction starting from the rotating shaft. intersects at a right angle with respect to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) of In other words, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453 and the center of the connecting member 454 is vertical, and intersects the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) of the elongated through-hole 416a at a right angle when viewed in the left-right direction. do.

As a result, the weight of the rotating unit 500 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453, and it is possible to prevent the weight of the rotating unit 500 from being applied in the rotating direction of the rotating arm member 453 (so-called dead point). Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 441 is released while the rotation unit 500 is in the raised position, the vertical position of the rotation unit 500 can be maintained. As a result, the driving time of the driving motor 441 can be reduced, and the heat generation thereof can be easily suppressed.

The extending direction of the extended arm portion 453b of the rotating arm member 453 and the elongated through-hole 416a intersect at a right angle when viewed in the left-right direction, which is the same even when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at the lowered position. (See FIG. 32(a)).

As a result, the upward load when the rotating unit 500 undergoes bound displacement (rebound displacement) after being placed in the lowered position is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating arm member 453 , and the load is applied to the rotating arm member 453 . Since it is possible to prevent the load in the rotational direction (so-called dead center effect occurs), even when the rotating unit 500 is moved to the lowered position at high speed, bound displacement (rebound displacement) can be easily prevented from occurring.

Therefore, it is partially unnecessary to generate a load in the drive motor 441 for preventing the bound displacement (rebound displacement), so that the driving time of the drive motor 441 can be reduced and heat generation can be easily suppressed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the state where the rotary unit 500 is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member 454 of the rotary arm member 453 is positioned at the rear end portion of the elongated through-hole 416a, that is, at the rear columnar member. 431 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the supporting force via the rotating arm member 453 is concentrated on the rear side of the supporting means 410, and the supporting means 410 and the front side portion of the rotating unit 500 are likely to wobble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front columnar member 431 is configured to support the stacking means 420 via the guide tubular portion 423 (see FIG. 23). As a result, the area (surface area) where the stacking means 420 is supported by the columnar member 431 can be increased, so that the stacking means 420, the support means 410, and the front side portion of the rotation unit 500 can be prevented from wobbling.

Displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 when the rotation unit 500 moves from the raised position to the lowered position will be described. As shown in FIG. 34( c ), the electrical wiring DK<b>1 is guided upward through the front side from the lower side of the support column portion 464 and fixed to the downwardly extending portion 519 .

As shown in FIG. 34(c), the downwardly extending portion 519 is arranged on the front side of the support column portion 464, so the portion (extra portion) hanging down from the downwardly extending portion 519 of the electrical wiring DK1 is It is arranged on the front side of the support column portion 464 .

The extra portion of the electrical wiring DK1 is vertically displaced as the downwardly extending portion 519 is moved vertically. For example, when the downwardly extending portion 519 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. See FIG. 33(c)).

As the lower extending portion 519 approaches the lower position of the rotating unit 500, the length of the electrical wiring DK1 that can be accommodated in the wiring auxiliary means 460 increases, and the diameter of the arc formed by the electrical wiring DK1 increases. .

In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced toward the front side due to the load received from the functional curved surface 463a. Since it is configured to be larger on the side, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the belt-shaped extension portion 463 to the electrical wiring DK1.

In addition, while the electric wire DK1 near the functional curved surface 463a (the electric wire DK1 near the bottom of the wiring auxiliary means 460) to which a load is applied by the contact between the electric wire DK1 and the functional curved surface 463a is moved toward the front side, the functional curved surface 463a The electric wiring DK1 hangs down from the downward extending portion 519 arranged at a position far from the front side end of the wiring auxiliary means 460 before coming into contact with the surface 463a. can be prevented from protruding to the front side from the front side end of the.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the front hanging portion 414 abuts the auxiliary wiring means 460 (the opening of the auxiliary wiring means 460 is partially closed) when the rotary unit 500 is placed at the lowered position is achieved. While adopting (see FIG. 32(c)), it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DK1 from being caught in the abutment portion (closed portion).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the functional curved portion 463a is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, so that the main displacement direction of the electric wiring DK1 is the front-rear direction. can be planned. As a result, an appropriate shape of the wiring assisting means 460 is selected from a shape in which the width in the left-right direction is short (narrow) in which the electric wire DK1 is unlikely to be displaced, and the width in the front-rear direction is long (wide) in which the electric wire DK1 is likely to be displaced. can do.

By partially restricting the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 and making it possible to select a shape with a narrow width in the horizontal direction as the shape of the auxiliary wiring means 460, the horizontal width of the combined action unit 402 can be suppressed.

Therefore, even in the configuration in which a plurality of combined action units 402 are arranged side by side as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 19), the shape of the auxiliary wiring means 460, which has an auxiliary role of accommodating the electric wiring DK1, is limited. As a result, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotation unit 500, which has a leading role that is visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

First, with respect to the positional deviation of the electrical wiring DK1 in the horizontal direction, a gap is secured between the left and right upper ends of the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the supporting means 410 (see FIG. 32(c)). It is possible to avoid applying a pinching load to the electric wiring DK1.

Secondly, the opposing plate 462 has an inclined portion 462a at its upper end that is inclined in a direction away from the right member 468 as it goes upward. By providing the inclined portion 468a inclined in the direction away from the electrical wiring DK1, the electric wiring DK1 is configured to easily slide into the wiring auxiliary means 460. As shown in FIG.

That is, since the inclined portions 462a and 468a are configured in an inverted V-shape in front view in which the width of the opening becomes longer toward the side on which the electric wire DK1 is received, the position of the electric wire DK1 may be shifted in either the left or right direction. Even so, the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily guided inside the wiring assisting means 460 . This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the electric wiring DK1 is caught on the upper edge of the wiring auxiliary means 460, is not guided by the wiring auxiliary means 460, and is sandwiched between the supporting means 410 and the wiring auxiliary means 460. can do.

Thirdly, it is designed so that the right and left positions of the wiring support portion 465 and the downwardly extending portion 519 that fix the electric wiring DK1 so as to be hung are aligned (see FIGS. 33(b) and 34(b)). . That is, by arranging the position where the electric wiring DK1 is fixed on the same plane perpendicular to the left-right direction, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 in the left-right direction due to the vertical displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

An example of action rendering using the first action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 35(a), 35(b), 35(c), 35(d), 35(e) and 35(f) show the third symbol display device 81 and the first operation unit 400. It is a front view of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81 and the 1st operation|movement unit 400 which are shown typically.

FIGS. 35(a), 35(b), 35(c) and 35(d) show examples of changes in the first operation unit 400 during a game in chronological order, and FIGS. FIG. 35(f) shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of rotating units 500 are interlocked to perform notification of different contents.

In this embodiment, the lighting or extinguishing of the rotating unit 500 is controlled to correspond to the number of retained balls that fluctuates as the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (or the second winning hole 640 or the through gate 67). That is, every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 (or second winning port 640, or through gate 67) (every time the number of held balls increases), the left end , the rotating unit 500 lights up (the LED member 544 lights up). That is, FIG. 35(a) shows a state in which there are three balls on hold.

The light emission color of the rotating unit 500 can be changed according to the light emission color of the LED member 544. Depending on the difference in the light emission color, the corresponding variation of the expectation of the big win (or the expectation of the small win, the expectation of the hit, the player's The difference in the degree of expectation of profit to be obtained) may be notified.

The plurality of LED members 544 are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to perform multi-color lighting effects with a small number of LEDs.

When the currently ongoing fluctuation stops, the leftmost rotating unit 500 is extinguished (see FIG. 35(b)), and the pending display correspondence shifts to the left one by one (see FIG. 35(c)).

Since the rotating unit 500 can be displaced between the raised position and the lowered position as described above, the third symbol display device 81 is partially hidden in the raised position as shown in FIG. can be controlled to rotate with

Thereby, attention to the rotation unit 500 can be improved. In addition, a decorative pattern arranged on the front side of the rotating unit 500 and a measure of the magnitude of the corresponding variation of the expectation of the big win (or the expectation of the small win, the expectation of the hit, the expectation of the profit that the player can obtain) are provided. By controlling in association with each other, attention to the rotating unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in FIG. 35(b), the third rotating unit 500 from the left rises and rotates, and then the surface forming member 560b is arranged on the front side, so that the decorative pattern of "?" is visually recognized by the player. be done. By this, the player is informed that the fluctuation expectation of the big win (or the expectation of the small win, the expectation of the hit, or the expectation of the profit to be obtained by the player) is unknown to attract the interest of the player. be able to.

Note that the mode of attracting interest is not limited to this. For example, the rotating body 560 may continue to rotate, or the LED member 544 may blink at high speed.

After that, as a result of shifting the correspondence of the pending display to the left one by one, the surface forming member 560a is arranged on the front side of the second rotating unit 500 from the left, so that the decorative pattern of "△" is visually recognized by the player. be done. Control is performed so that the degree of expectation of a big win (or the degree of expectation of a small win, the degree of winning, or the degree of expectation of profit to be obtained by a player) is higher in the decorative pattern of "△" than in the decorative pattern of "○". In this case, it is possible to improve attention to the variation corresponding to the second rotating unit 500 from the left.

The notification of the degree of expectation of the big win (or the degree of expectation of the small win, the degree of winning, or the degree of expectation of the profit that the player can obtain) is based on the pending display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the number of pending balls. You may implement by changing a color or a form. Further, control may be performed so that the pending display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the state of the rotating unit 500 are associated with each other. Further, an effect may be adopted in which a time lag is provided between the change in the hold display and the change in the state of the rotating unit 500 .

As shown in FIG. 35(c), as a result of the pending display being shifted one by one to the left, the third rotating unit 500 from the left is turned off and displaced to the lowered position. Due to this displacement, the hidden range of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible. It is possible to improve attention to the third symbol display device 81 after the unit 300 is displaced to the lowered position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by controlling the rotation unit 500 in relation to the variation of the symbols and the number of balls held, not only is the attention of the player improved, but also the third symbol display device 81 By configuring the display area so that it can be partially hidden, it can function as a blindfold when changing the display of the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, as an auxiliary effect of increasing attention to the rotation unit 500 that partially hides the third pattern display device 81, attention is directed to the rotation unit 500 arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81. By withdrawing the rotating unit 500 (see FIG. 35(c)) from the state (see FIG. 35(b)), the player's line of sight can be left facing the third symbol display device 81. As a result, since the player's line of sight can be guided to the third pattern display device 81, attention to the third pattern display device 81 can be improved.

From the state shown in FIG. 35(c), the correspondence of the pending display is shifted to the left by two, and when the variation corresponding to the pending shown with the decorative pattern of "△" in FIG. 35(c) is a jackpot By arranging a plurality of rotating bodies 560 in the raised position as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player visually recognize a string (a character string that reminds the player of a change to a state in which the player can obtain some kind of profit, such as a big win).

In this case, it is preferable to light the LED member 544 regardless of the number of held balls. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be illuminated brilliantly, and an effect that arouses the player's sense of expectation can be executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure an effect in which the plurality of rotating bodies 560 are visually recognized individually and an effect in which the plurality of rotating bodies 560 are collectively viewed. Here, the effect of collectively visually recognizing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 35(d), and various modes are exemplified.

For example, as shown in FIG. 35(e), the third rotating body 560 from the left is placed in the lowered position, and the remaining rotating bodies 560 are placed in the raised position to produce a character string "HI!" A character string reminiscent of ) can be visually recognized by the player.

By controlling the state shown in FIG. 35(e) to occur periodically in the standby state before the player starts playing the game, the interest of the player can be attracted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(f), if the surface forming member 560b of only the rightmost rotor 560 faces the front side, the character string "HIT?" can be visually recognized by the player. .

In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the anticipation that "HIT!" Moreover, you may direct like that. That is, the state of FIG. 35(f) may be changed to the state of FIG. 35(d) by controlling the rotating body 560 on the right end to rotate.

36(a) and 36(b) are left side views of the detection sensor 547 and the follower plate 575 of the right rotating lid portion 570. FIG. FIG. 36(a) shows a state in which the detection sensor 547 is arranged at one end (the front end in FIG. 36(a)) of the non-formation range of the detected portion 577, and FIG. ) shows a state in which the detection sensor 547 is arranged at the opposite end (the rear end in FIG. 36B) of the non-formation range of the detected portion 577 .

The states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) both indicate the state of waiting for rotation (stopped state). That is, in FIG. 36A, the non-formation range of the detected portion 577 from the time when the detected portion 577 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 during rotation of the rotating body 560 is an angle α1 (in this embodiment, 60 degrees) is rotated by half an angle (30 degrees in this embodiment) and the driving motor 541 is stopped. In FIG. The figure shows a state in which the driving motor 541 is stopped immediately after the portion to be detected 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in the state where the drive motor 541 is stopped.

The angle difference between the states shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B depends on the angle of the non-formed portion of the detected portion 577 . In this embodiment, the detected portion 577 is formed so that the angle α1 of the non-formed portion is 60 degrees, and the angle difference between the states shown in FIGS. be done.

This angular difference is designed in correspondence with the direction of the player's line of sight that changes as the rotary unit 500 is vertically displaced. That is, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at the raised position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotating unit 500 is directed substantially horizontally. The decorative pattern of the body 560 can be made easy to see, and the presentation effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the rotating unit 500 is placed at the lowered position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotating unit 500 is a downward view. The decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 can be made easy to see, and the presentation effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of stop postures of the rotating unit 500 are configured according to the relationship with the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the rotating unit 500. The rotating body 560 can be stopped in a posture that makes it easy for the player to see the decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 regardless of whether it is arranged at the lowered position.

36(a) and the state shown in FIG. 36(b) are different in the correspondence relationship between the detection sensor 547 and the detected portion 577 because of the presentation mode using the rotating body 560 (for example, This is due to the difference in rotational speed of the rotor 560 .

That is, the state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the stop position in which the rotation unit 500 is arranged at the raised position. Since they are sufficiently collected in the unit 500, the rotation speed of the rotating body 560 is slowed down and stopped slowly, so that the player's interest can be improved over a long period of time.

For example, the change from the state shown in FIG. 35(f) to the state shown in FIG. 35(d) is produced by slowly rotating the rotator 560, thereby prolonging the period during which the player's sense of expectation is heightened. , and the attention of the rotating body 560 can be maintained. Therefore, even if the position is determined by the detection sensor 547 and then rotated by half the angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) of the non-formation range of the detected portion 577 and then stopped. There is little possibility that the stop posture will deviate, and the rotating body 560 can be easily stopped in the posture shown in FIG. 36(a).

According to this control mode, the rotating body 560 can be stopped in the attitude shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to select a control mode of stopping after forward rotation and a control mode of stopping after reverse rotation depending on the case, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the operation mode until the rotating body 560 stops. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is the stop position with the rotating unit 500 placed at the lowered position. In many cases, it is not sufficiently gathered, so increasing the rotation speed of the rotating body 560 makes it easier to improve the interest of the player.

In the case of high-speed rotation, after the position is determined by the detection sensor 547, control is performed to stop after rotating half the angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) of the non-formation range of the detected portion 577. In this case, the stop position of the rotating body 560 may shift. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36(b), by stopping the drive motor 541 immediately after the portion 577 to be detected enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the stop position of the rotating body 560. .

Rotation control of the rotation unit 500 is performed by rotating the rotating unit 500 at rotation angles (90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees) set at intervals of 90 degrees from the plurality of types of stop positions described above, and then stopping the surface forming member 560a. 560d can be stopped in a posture that allows the player to visually recognize the surface.

As described above, the postures shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are designed to accommodate changes in the line of sight of the player. ) can be avoided from being viewed by the player.

That is, since the drive motor 541 is arranged inside the rotating body 560, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the rotating body 560 regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight, and the driving motor 541 is visible to the player. can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 36( a ) and 36 ( b ), in the rotating unit 500 , a structure for detecting the angle of the rotating body 560 is arranged inside the rotating body 560 . Therefore, most of the outer portion of the rotating body 560 can be decorated with a decorative pattern, and the presentation effect of the rotating body 560 can be improved.

In addition, the arrangement of a blind portion (a structure for preventing the angle detection structure from being visually recognized) that may be necessary when the structure for detecting the angle is arranged outside the rotating body 560. While omitting the installation, the rotating body 560 can be configured to be rotatable by one rotation or more.

37 and 38 are front perspective views of the second operation unit 700, and FIGS. 39 and 40 are rear perspective views of the second operation unit 700. FIG. 37 and 39 show the standby state of the second operation unit 700 in which the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780 are arranged at the standby position (upward end position), and FIGS. And the state in which the rendering means 780 is arranged in the projecting position (lowering end position) projecting forward of the third pattern display device 81 is illustrated.

In the second operation unit 700, each movable part is displaced so as to reduce the amount of displacement of the electric wires DK2 and DK3 guided to each movable part for supplying electricity, and the coil spring SP1 can be seen from the front view. It is equipped with a spring cover SC1 that hides it so as not to be exposed, and has a feature that the spring cover SC1 enters inside the displacement base member 720 and the effect means 780, the details of which will be described later. It should be noted that the coil spring SP1 is schematically shown in the shape of a curved quadrangular prism.

41 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of the fixed base member 701, the displacement base member 720, the driving means 730, the transmission means 740 and the biasing means 750, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of drive means 730, transmission means 740 and biasing means 750. FIG. That is, FIG. 43 shows a part of FIG. 41, and FIG. 44 shows a part of FIG. 42 in an enlarged manner.

45 is an exploded front perspective view of the supported means 760L, 760R and connecting means 770, and FIG. 46 is an exploded rear perspective view of the supported means 760L, 760R and connecting means 770. FIG. That is, FIG. 45 shows a part of FIG. 41, and FIG. 46 shows a part of FIG. 42 in an enlarged manner.

47 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect means 780, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect means 780. As shown in FIG. That is, FIG. 47 shows a part of FIG. 41, and FIG. 48 shows a part of FIG. 42 in an enlarged manner.

49 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in a plane extending horizontally through the columnar fastening portion 705c of the support means 705. FIG. 41 to 49, FIGS. 37 to 40 are referred to as needed.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, the second operation unit 700 includes a left and right long fixed base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, and arranged on the front side of the base member 701. A displacement base member 720 configured to be vertically displaceable with respect to the fixed base member 701 , driving means 730 for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement base member 720 , A transmission means 740 configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force to the displacement base member 720, a biasing means 750 for applying an upward biasing force to the displacement base member 720, and a pair of right and left sides disposed on the displacement base member 720. The supported means 760L and 760R are rotatably supported at the central end), the other ends (left and right outer ends) of the supported means 760L and 760R, and the left and right ends of the fixed base member 701. and a directing means 780 fastened and fixed to the front side of the displacement base member 720 for the purpose of decoration in a front view.

The fixed base member 701 is made of a synthetic resin material and includes a main body plate portion 702 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a bar-like projection of the same length from the main body plate portion 702 toward the front side. a plurality of cover support projections 703 formed at the tip so that the spring cover SC1 can be fastened and fixed, a spring support portion 704 extending from the main body plate portion 702 toward the front side above the cover support projection 703 at the left end, A support means 705 for supporting gear members such as a transmission gear 734 and a terminal gear 745 for transmitting driving force, and a portion for pivotally supporting a rotating arm member 743 of the transmission means 740. a metal slide rail 711 to which the plate on the rear side is fixed to the left-right central portion of the main body plate portion 702 so as to be vertically slidably displaceable; A pair of cylindrical overhanging portions 714 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a front view from the position where they are located, and a pair of left and right end upper stoppers 717 arranged side by side with the cylindrical overhanging portions 714 above the cylindrical overhanging portions 714. A pair of left and right end lower stoppers 719 formed with a flat surface along the radial direction of the tubular projecting portion 714 on the rear side of the front and rear position of the tubular projecting portion 714 pivotally supporting the coupling means 770 . and

The supporting means 705 includes a columnar fastening portion 705a projecting from the rear surface of the fixed base member 701 in a cylindrical shape having a slightly shorter diameter than the opening of the transmission gear 734 and having a female screw formed at the distal end thereof. An annular recessed portion 705b is recessed in a double annular shape from the front surface of the plate, and a female screw is provided at the center position of the annular recessed portion 705b to protrude from the front surface of the plate of the fixed base member 701 in a cylindrical shape. A columnar fastening portion 705c formed with, a plurality of protrusions 705d formed as protrusions extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface of the annular recessed portion 705b, and the outermost inner peripheral surface of the annular recessed portion 705b It mainly includes a meshing opening 705e drilled in.

The annular recessed portion 705b is formed with a diameter and width that allow placement of the annular portion of the terminal gear 745 (an annular portion having a gear formed on its outer periphery). The terminal gear 745 is rotatably supported by a fastening screw that is inserted through an opening formed in the center of the terminal gear 745 and screwed into the columnar fastening portion 705c.

The protrusions 705 d are arranged at eight locations in 45-degree increments, and are formed with a protrusion height that allows the tips to come into contact with the inner circumference of the annular portion of the terminal gear 745 . As a result, compared to the case where the circles are fitted together, the annular portion of the terminal gear 745 and the annular concave portion can be arranged while maintaining the function of stabilizing the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 745 (stabilization of the axially supported state). The contact area with 705b can be reduced. As a result, the driving force required to rotate the terminal gear 745 can be reduced.

The meshing opening 705e is formed along the inner periphery of the annular recessed portion 705b and the rear side bottom portion. As for the rear-side bottom portion, at least an opening is formed at a position overlapping with a circle centered on the columnar fastening portion 705a (circle with the outermost diameter of the transmission gear 734) when viewed from the rear. As a result, the transmission gear 734 can be pivotally supported by the columnar fastening portion 705a in a state of protruding inside the engagement opening 705e (the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b).

In this embodiment, the gear tooth portion of the transmission gear 734 projecting toward the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b through the meshing opening 705e and the gear tooth portion of the terminal gear 745 are configured to mesh with each other. As a result, the transmission gear 734 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the back side and is pivotally supported, while the terminal gear 745 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the front side and is pivotally supported. A driving force can be transmitted by meshing transmission between the transmission gear 734 and the terminating gear 745 .

The meshing openings 705e are formed only at locations necessary for projecting the transmission gear 734 to the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b, and openings are not formed at other locations. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive lack of strength of the fixed base member 701 near the support means 705 .

The circular protruding portion 708 includes a plurality of positioning protruding pins 709 protruding from the front end face, and a plurality of protrusions 710 protruding radially outward along the length of the protruding portion.

The protrusion 710 is disposed between the rotating arm member 743 and the circular protruding portion 708 and functions to suppress the contact area between the rotating arm member 743 and the circular protruding portion 708 . In this case, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance of the shaft support portion, which tends to be a problem when the circular protruding portion 708 is formed with a large diameter. Frictional resistance caused by displacement of the moving arm member 743 can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force required to displace the second operation unit 700 .

The metal slide rail 711 is formed by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction, and the metal plate at the end on the front side is connected and fixed to the displacement base member 720 . That is, the displacement base member 720 is guided by the metal slide rail 711 so as to be displaced in the vertical direction.

The tubular projecting portion 714 has an outer peripheral shape that is circular when viewed from the front, and is a portion that rotatably supports the coupling means 770. The tubular projecting portion 714 has an opening 714a penetrating in the front-rear direction and an opening 714a penetrating in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of fastening portions 716 formed with female threads on the front side end of a portion where the projecting pins 715 do not project.

The opening 714a serves as a passing path for the electrical wiring DK2. That is, the electrical wiring DK2 is guided to the front side through the opening 714a, and is fixed by tightening a wire fastening member such as a binding band to the front side end portion of the upper left and right end stoppers 717 to the fixing shape portion 718. .

In this embodiment, of the upper left and right end stoppers 717, a fixing shape portion 718 is formed so as to protrude from the front end surface of the upper left and right end stoppers 717, and has a shape through which a binding band can be passed. , and the left and right end upper stoppers 717 on the right side are not formed with the fixing shaped portions 718 .

In this manner, the shape of the fixed base member 701 is simplified by forming the fixing shape portion 718 only on the left side of the upper left and right end stoppers 717 where the electrical wiring DK2 is guided, and omitting the formation on the opposite side. can be achieved. In addition, by not forming the shape portion 718 for fixing in an unnecessary portion, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembling operator.

Since the openings 714a are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides, the electric wiring DK2 can be guided to the front side at both the left and right ends, but in this embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is guided only through the opening 714a on the left side. , the electric wiring DK2 is not arranged in the opening 714a on the right side.

As a result, there is no need to design the right tubular projecting portion 714 and the right coupling means 770 pivotally supported by the right tubular projecting portion 714 in consideration of the relationship with the electric wiring DK2. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the protruding portion 714, the right connecting means 770, and their surroundings can be improved.

Regardless of this, the electric wiring DK2 may be passed through both of the pair of left and right openings 714a to the front side and guided to the left and right supported means 760L and 760R, respectively. In this case, since the load applied to the supported means 760L and 760R via the electric wiring DK2 can be easily made the same on the left and right sides, the displacement of the supported means 760L and 760R that follow the displacement of the displaceable base member 720 can be controlled to the left and right. Symmetry can be facilitated.

The protruding pin 715 and the fastening portion 716 form a circle formed by connecting surfaces that form the shape of the opening 714a and on which neither the protruding pin 715 nor the fastening portion 716 are arranged (the circumscribed circle of the opening 714a). formed so as to protrude toward the center of the That is, unlike the outer peripheral shape (circular shape), the inner peripheral shape of the tubular projecting portion 714 is a shape that is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of points on the circumference of the circle.

Here, for example, if the inner peripheral shape of the tubular projecting portion 714 is a perfect circle, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 may be reduced. That is, since the electrical wiring DK2 inserted through the opening 714a is connected to the electrical board 764 of the supported means 760L, there is a possibility that it will be displaced according to the displacement of the supported means 760L. If the degree of rubbing against the edge of the cylindrical projecting portion 714 is large, there is a possibility that the coating of the electrical wiring DK2 will be damaged early, or that the electrical wiring DK2 will be disconnected early.

As a countermeasure, it is possible to provide a tubular intermediate member (collar) that can slide between the tubular projecting portion 714 and the electrical wiring DK2, or to wind a separate covering member around the electrical wiring DK2. , the cost of separate members increases, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, by making the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical projecting portion 714 recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of points of the circle, the electrical wiring DK2, which tends to be displaced along the edge of the opening 714a, can be easily displaced. Since it can be restricted at the protruding pin 715 and the fastening portion 716, the degree of rubbing of the electric wiring DK2 against the edge of the cylindrical projecting portion 714 can be suppressed.

This improvement does not require a separate member, and solves the problem simply by devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. Therefore, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved while suppressing an increase in product cost.

By winding a spiral tube around the electrical wiring DK2, it is possible to limit the free displacement of the electrical wiring DK2. may increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced by omitting the provision of the spiral tube, and the free displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is restricted by the attitude change of the supported means 760, which will be described later. there is

The upper left and right end stoppers 717 are configured to be able to abut against lateral side surfaces of the coupling means 770 pivotally supported by the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 , and the abutment defines ends of upward displacement of the coupling means 770 . Thereby, the displacement angle of the connecting means 770 can be limited.

The left and right end lower stoppers 719 are configured to be able to come into contact with the rotational direction side surfaces of the arc-shaped projections 775 of the connecting means 770 pivotally supported by the tubular overhanging portion 714, and the contact causes the connecting means 770 to be displaced in the downward direction. Define termination. Thereby, the displacement angle of the connecting means 770 can be limited.

As described above, the left and right end upper stoppers 717 and the left and right end lower stoppers 719 are configured to contact the connecting means 770 in the rotational direction of the connecting means 770, but the front and rear positions of contact with the connecting means 770 are different. . As a result, it is possible to avoid the load (fatigue) due to contact from accumulating at a specific position (front and rear position) of the connecting means 770, and the durability of the connecting means 770 can be improved.

The contact position corresponding to the displacement direction of the connecting means 770 can be selected according to the purpose. For example, in the present embodiment, the upward displacement is the upward displacement of the effect means 780 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15), and at the terminal position of the upward displacement, the connecting means 770 moves toward the back side of the game board 13. Since it is placed at the position of the player and is difficult to be seen by the player (see FIG. 2), fine adjustment of the displacement end position is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to adopt the option of regulating the displacement by bringing the connecting means 770 into contact with an outer shape portion whose design is difficult to change due to the strength and structure of the connecting means 770 .

In addition, the displacement speed of the coupling means 770 is suppressed because the gravity faces the direction to suppress the displacement of the coupling means 770 during the upward displacement. Therefore, the option of defining the displacement by abutting against a thinned portion of the coupling means 770 can be adopted.

On the other hand, the descending displacement is a displacement in which the effect means 780 moves toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 15), and at the terminal position of the descending displacement, the arrangement is determined by the connecting means 770 and the connecting means 770. Since the pivot means 760L and 760R are arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 and can be easily seen by the player (see FIG. 16), it is thought that fine adjustment of the displacement end position will be necessary in the prototype design stage. be done. Therefore, it is better to adopt the option of defining the displacement by contacting the arc-shaped protrusion 775, which is easy to change in design, instead of the external shape, at the design prototype stage. It is possible to minimize the design change required for fine adjustment of the displacement end position of the .

That is, by changing the shape and arrangement of the arcuate protrusion 775, the displacement end positions of the coupling means 770 and the supported means 760L and 760R can be changed.

In addition, during the downward displacement, gravity is directed in the same direction as the displacement of the connecting means 770, and there is a possibility of adopting an effect of displacing the effect means 780 to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 at high speed. Since it is high, the downward displacement of the connecting means 770 tends to be high speed, and it is considered that the load at the time of contact becomes large.

Therefore, since there is a possibility that the connecting means 770 will be damaged if the thin portion is brought into contact with the connecting means 770, the arc-shaped protrusion 775 is formed long to secure a large contact area, thereby reducing the pressure applied to the connecting means 770. The durability of the connection means 770 can be improved by adopting the option of drawing.

Thus, also in the present embodiment, the contact positions of the connecting means 770 and the left and right end upper stoppers 717 and the left and right end lower stoppers 719 are respectively set according to the purpose. Therefore, when the position of the second operation unit 700 with respect to the third pattern display device 81 and the direction of displacement change, the options for the abutting position of the connecting means 770 and the options to be adopted are varied. Of course, that could change.

The displacement base member 720 includes a body plate portion 721 to which the metal slide rail 711 is fastened and fixed on the back side, and a columnar shape projecting from the center of the body plate portion 721 in the left-right direction toward the front side. A protruding fastening portion 722 formed with a female screw into which a screw member can be screwed for fixing the end of the main body plate portion 721, and a long opening 723 bored in the left half of the main body plate portion 721 in a left and right long shape. and a pair of tubular projecting portions 724 projecting from the main body plate portion 721 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape when viewed from the front; Upper and lower stoppers 727 projecting to regulate the displacement angles of the supported means 760L and 760R, and the electrical wiring DK3 formed in a pair of left and right in the lower half of the main body plate portion 721 are intended to avoid interference with other components. and an interference avoidance configuration unit 728 that is one of.

The long opening 723 is an opening through which the connecting column portion 743b and the collar C1 of the transmission means 740 are inserted, and is formed with a width and length that allow the connecting column portion 743b and the collar C1 to be displaced.

Similar to the cylindrical protrusion 714 described above for the fixed base member 701, the cylindrical protrusion 724 has a circular outer peripheral shape in a front view, thereby rotatably supporting the supported means 760L and 760R. 724a passing through in the front-rear direction, a plurality of positioning pins 725 projecting from the front end toward the front, and portions where the projecting pins 725 do not project. and a plurality of fastening portions 726 that are internally threaded at the front end.

The opening 724a serves as a passing path for the electrical wiring DK3. That is, the electric wiring DK3 is guided in the front-rear direction through the opening 724a. The electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the supported means 760L and 760R and the rendering means fixed to the displacement base member 720, the details of which will be described later.

The protruding pin 725 and the fastening portion 726 form a circle formed by connecting surfaces that form the shape of the opening 724a and on which neither the protruding pin 725 nor the fastening portion 726 are arranged (the circumscribed circle of the opening 724a). formed so as to protrude toward the center of the In other words, the inner peripheral shape of the tubular projecting portion 724 is different from the outer peripheral shape (circular shape) in that the circle is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of points on the circumference.

Here, for example, if the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 is a perfect circle, the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 may decrease. That is, since the electrical wiring DK3 inserted through the opening 724a is connected to the electrical board 764 of the supported means 760L, there is a possibility that it will be displaced according to the displacement of the supported means 760L. If the degree of rubbing against the edge of the tubular projecting portion 724 is large, the coating of the electrical wiring DK3 may be damaged early, or the electrical wiring DK3 may be disconnected early.

As a countermeasure, it is possible to provide a tubular intermediate member (collar) that can slide between the tubular projecting portion 724 and the electrical wiring DK3, or to wind a separate covering member around the electrical wiring DK3. , the cost of separate members increases, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, by making the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical projecting portion 724 recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of locations of the circle, the electrical wiring DK3, which tends to be displaced along the edge of the opening 724a, can be easily displaced. Restrictions can be made at the protruding pins 725 and fastening portions 726 . That is, the projecting pin 725 and the fastening portion 726 can dam the displacement of the electric wire DK3, and the displacement angle of the electric wire DK3 can be limited to a small value. It is possible to suppress the degree of rubbing of the

This improvement does not require a separate member, and solves the problem simply by devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 724a. Therefore, the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved while suppressing an increase in product cost.

The vertical stopper 727 is configured to be capable of regulating the displacement of the supported means 760L and 760R. do not necessarily contact the supported means 760L, 760R.

That is, in this embodiment, when the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the end position of the rise, the lower stopper and the supported means 760L, 760R are configured to abut one side (the supported means 760L, 760R). ), the upper stopper is arranged so that a gap is generated between the supported means 760L and 760R even when the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the lowered end position.

As a result, when the displaceable base member 720 is displaced toward the lower end position at high speed, even if the supported means 760L and 760R are displaced at high speed in conjunction with the displaceable base member 720, the displaceable base member 720 reaches the lower end position. At this time, the supported means 760L, 760R and the upper upper and lower stoppers 727 do not contact each other. The load applied from the shaft support means 760L, 760R to the upper vertical stopper 727 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the rotational ends of the supported means 760L and 760R are defined by the relationship with the coupling means 770 (see FIG. 54), and the supported means 760L and 760R are arranged at the rotation upper end positions. Even so, the upper and lower stoppers 727 are formed so that a slight gap is generated between the shaft support means 760L, 760R and the upper stoppers.

The upper and lower stoppers 727 are arranged in the form of thin plates in the upper and lower directions so as to correspond to the respective cylindrical projecting portions 724 . As a result, it is possible to cause a slight bending deformation when contacting the supported members 760L and 760R, so that the load applied to the supported members 760L and 760R during contact can be partially offset. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the supported members 760L and 760R.

In particular, the lower stopper tends to be subjected to a load due to the weight of the supported means 760L and 760R for a long period of time. , there is a possibility that the shape will be fixed while being flexurally deformed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the opposite side of the contact surface of the lower stopper, a projecting portion 727a projecting toward the front side in the same manner as the upper and lower stoppers 727 is arranged oppositely with a gap. . Since the lower stopper and the projecting portion 727a are connected at the upper and lower end portions of the mutually facing surfaces, the deformation of the lower stopper is received by the projecting portion 727a.

Thereby, the degree of bending deformation of the upper and lower stoppers 727 can be adjusted. That is, the degree of bending deformation of the lower stopper can be made smaller than that of the upper stopper by the amount that the projecting portion 727a receives the load (the amount of resistance that is generated). As a result, even if a load due to the weight of the supported means 760L, 760R is applied for a long period of time, the amount of bending deformation of the lower stopper can be kept small. can be lowered.

In the above description, the thickness of the upper and lower stoppers 727 (thicknesses in the direction of rotation of the supported means 760L and 760R) is set to be equal between the upper and lower portions, and a simple method of adjusting the amount of bending deformation of the stoppers while maintaining high resin moldability. However, the method of adjusting the amount of bending deformation of the stopper is not limited to this, and various methods are exemplified. For example, a flexible (highly deformable) cushion member may be provided, or a stopper may be displaceably supported by the main body plate portion 721 .

The interference avoidance component 728 has a left and right long shape and is formed to connect a long opening 728a drilled in the main body plate portion 721 and both upper and lower edges of the long opening 728 at the center position of the left and right. A U-shaped projecting portion 728b projecting to the front side and having a U-shaped shape in a side view is provided. The long opening 728 is an opening through which the electrical wiring DK3 passes, and the U-shaped projecting portion 728b is formed for one purpose of supporting the electrical wiring DK3, details of which will be described later.

The drive means 730 includes a drive motor 731 capable of rotating in both forward and reverse directions, a support plate 732 to which the motor case of the drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed, and a drive plate inserted through the support plate 732 to the front side. It mainly includes a motor gear 733 that is inserted and fixed to the shaft, and a transmission gear 734 that meshes with the motor gear 733 and is pivotally supported by the columnar fastening portion 705 a of the support means 705 of the fixed base member 701 .

The support plate 732 is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 702 from the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 39). Some of the teeth are arranged so as to be able to protrude, and meshing with the teeth of the terminal gear 745 enables the driving force generated by the drive motor 731 to be transmitted to the transmission means 740 .

The transmission means 740 includes a ring member 741 fitted onto the circular projecting portion 708 with a gap, and a ring member 741 aligned with the protruding pin 709 before being fastened and fixed to the front end surface of the circular projecting portion 708 . A lid member 742, a rotating arm member 743 arranged between the front lid member 742 and the ring member 741 and having a base end side opening 743a pivotally supported by the circular projecting portion 708, and the rotating arm member 743 having a length. A transmission hole 744 drilled in an elongated shape, a terminal gear 745 rotatably supported by the annular recessed portion 705b and the columnar fastening portion 705c of the support means 705, and the rotation axis from the eccentric position of the terminal gear 745 and a photocoupler-type detection device capable of detecting the rotational position of the terminating gear 745 (that the terminating gear 745 is in the initial arrangement). A detection sensor 747 fixed to the plate portion 702 is mainly provided.

The ring member 741 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the rotating arm member 743 and the main body plate portion 702, so that the rotating arm member 743 can operate smoothly. We are trying to be

In addition, the circular projecting portion 708 on which the ring member 741 is supported is designed to reduce friction of the ring member 741 in the rotational direction by means of the projections 710, so that the ring member 741 can be easily slid.

As with the ring member 741, the base end opening 743a of the rotating arm member 743 is also rotatably supported by fitting in the range where the protrusion 710 of the circular projecting portion 708 is formed. Not only the friction of the ring member 741 in the rotational direction can be reduced, but also the friction of the rotating arm member 743 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

The rotating arm member 743 includes a connecting column portion 743b projecting in a columnar shape from the rotating tip side toward the front side. The connecting column portion 743b is inserted through the elongated opening 723 of the displacement base member 720, and driving force is transmitted to the displacement base member 720 via the connecting column portion 743b.

A tubular collar C1, which is a member for reducing friction, is disposed on the connection column portion 743b, and a screw with a flange is screwed into a female thread formed at the tip portion of the connection column portion 743b. Thus, the flange of the screw prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

The rotating arm 743 is provided with a recess relief portion extending from the back side to the front side above the transmission hole 744 (see FIG. 44). The recess relief portion is a relief shape portion for avoiding interference with the detection sensor 747 when the rotating arm 743 is arranged at the rising end position (see FIG. 50). As a result, the outer shape of the rotating arm 743 is expanded to a position where it interferes with the detecting sensor 747 in a front view (the rotating arm 743 is widened) while avoiding the restriction of the arrangement of the rotating arm 743 by the detection sensor 747. can be formed).

Most of the transmission hole 744 is configured as an elongated hole along the straight line direction, but at the rotation base end side end portion of the rotation arm member 743, a curved shape portion 744a capable of guiding the eccentric column portion 746 is provided. . The relationship between the curved portion 744a and the eccentric column portion 746 and the effect of the curved portion 744a will be described later.

The terminating gear 745 is meshed with the transmission gear 734 in the assembled state (see FIG. 39) and rotates in conjunction with the rotational driving of the drive motor 731 . In other words, the driving force of the drive motor 731 is transmitted to the drive motor 731, the motor gear 733, the transmission gear 734, and the terminal gear 745 in this order, and further downstream from the terminal gear 745 to the rotating arm member 743 and the displacement base member 720. is transmitted.

The eccentric column 746 is provided with a tubular collar C1 which is a member for reducing friction. Thus, the flange of the screw prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

The detection sensor 747 has a detection groove directed in a direction in which a plate-shaped portion to be detected 745a extending radially outward from the terminal gear 745 can be inserted. The arrangement of the terminating gear 745 is detected depending on whether or not it is present.

The biasing means 750 includes a spring cover SC1 formed in an L-shaped plate when viewed from the front, a coil spring SP1 disposed on the back side thereof, and a flanged cylindrical shape arranged to bend the coil spring SP1. and a member 751 .

The flanged tubular member 751 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion SC1j projecting in a circular shape toward the back side of the spring cover SC1, and functions as a fixed pulley. A coil spring SP1 is arranged so as to be curved in an arc shape. As a result, the coil spring SP1 can be expanded and contracted in a substantially L shape, so compared with the case where the coil spring SP1 is expanded and contracted linearly, the flexibility of adjusting the elastic force of the coil spring SP1 can be improved within a small range. can be done.

The coil spring SP1 has an upper end supported by the spring support portion 704 of the fixed base member 701 and a lower end supported by a screw member screwed into the projecting fastening portion 722 of the displacement base member 720. . That is, the biasing means 750 is arranged on the front side of the displacement base member 720 .

Although the supported means 760L and 760R have slightly different external shapes, there are many structures related to functions that are bilaterally symmetrical. However, the detailed description of the other (the right supported means 760R) is omitted.

The supported means 760 includes a thin-walled ring member 761 that is fitted onto the cylindrical protruding portion 724 with a gap therebetween, and a fastening screw that is fastened to the fastening portion 726 while aligned with the projecting pin 725 . A front lid member 762 is fastened and fixed to the front side end face of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 by being attached, and the circular overhanging portion 724 is arranged between the front lid member 762 and the thin ring member 761 and has an opening on the base end side. A driven displacement member 763 on which 763a is pivotally supported, an electrical board 764 fastened and fixed to the front side of the driven displacement member 763, and a portion for guiding the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the electrical board 764. A guide portion 765 disposed on the rotation tip side of the driven displacement member 763, a columnar fastening portion 766 projecting from the rotation tip side to the rear side in a columnar shape and having a female screw formed on the tip side, and an electric board. 764 and mainly includes a diffusion member for diffusing light and a decorative member 768 in which a design member forming a design in a front view is laminated.

The thin plate ring member 761 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the driven displacement member 763 and the main body plate portion 702, thereby allowing the driven displacement member 763 to operate smoothly. I am trying to be

The front lid member 762 has an opening 762a for passing wires, which is bored in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 724a. The electric wiring DK3 is passed through the opening 762a in the front-rear direction, guided to the rear side of the main body plate portion 721, and guided to the front side through the elongated opening 728a, which will be described later in detail.

The electrical board 764 has connector portions 764a at both ends to which the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 are connected. Here, the supply of electricity related to the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 and the electrical board 764 will be described. First, the electrical wiring DK2 positioned and fixed by the banding band passed through the fixing shape portion 718 is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the left end portion of the electrical board 764 of the supported means 760L.

One end of the electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a disposed at the right end of the left electrical board 764, and the other end of the electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the connection terminal 784 of the effect means 780. The electric wiring DK3 is arranged symmetrically, and the electric wiring DK3 on the right side is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the left end portion of the electric decoration board 764 on the right side and the connection terminal 784 of the effect means 780. .

As described above, in this embodiment, the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 are connected at the ends of the supported means 760, and the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 are not provided at the middle portion of the supported means 760. there is By making the electrical board 764 arranged in the omitted part play a role as an electricity supplying means for the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3, the range of displacement of the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 is minimized, and the electrical wiring DK2 can be displaced. , DK3 to ensure a long path for the electricity to be supplied.

In addition, by causing the electrical board 783 of the effecting means 780 to serve as an electricity supplying means for the electrical wiring DK3, the electric wiring DK3 is guided to the guide portion 765 arranged at the left end portion of the left supported means 760L. Electricity can be supplied to the right pivoted means 760R via the electric wiring DK2.

As a result, it is possible to supply electricity to the supported means 760R without connecting electric wiring from the right end portion of the supported means 760R. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the configuration around the supported means 760R.

For example, when executing a displacement that lowers the supported means 760 at high speed, it is necessary to consider that the electrical wiring DK2 is not left behind for the supported means 760L, but for the supported means 760R is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to employ a displacement mode in which only the supported means 760R is lowered at high speed.

Further, for example, it becomes easy to dispose a member between the upper left and right end stoppers 717 on the right side and the supported means 760R. Thereby, a member can be arranged on the front side of the connecting means 770, and the connecting means 770 can be hidden by the member.

The guide portion 765 has an opening 765a formed as an opening in which the connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of the electrical board 764 can be arranged, and a front surface as a route capable of guiding the electric wiring DK2 toward the opening 765a. A path portion 765b having an open side and a U-shaped cross section is provided.

The columnar fastening portion 766 is provided with a collar C1 that is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The flange prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

The difference between the right decorative board 764 and the (left) decorative board 764 is that there is no electrical wiring connection through the right end, so the right end of the right decorative board 764 has a connector. part is not installed. For the same reason, the guide portion 765 is not provided on the driven displacement member 763 on the right side.

Since the left and right connecting means 770 are composed of members having substantially the same shape, the configuration of the left connecting means 770 will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the right connecting means 770 will be omitted. The connection means 770 has a thin-walled ring member 771 fitted on the cylindrical projecting portion 714 with a gap, and a fastening screw that is fastened to the fastening portion 716 while aligned with the projecting pin 715 . As a result, a front lid member 772 fastened and fixed to the front side end surface of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714, and a base end side opening 773a is formed in the circular overhanging portion 714 disposed between the front lid member 772 and the thin ring member 771. A driven displacement member 773 that is pivotally supported, a long opening 774 that is bored along the radial direction of the driven displacement member 773, and an opening 773a that extends toward the rear side of the driven displacement member 773. It mainly includes an arc-shaped protrusion 775 that protrudes in an arc shape.

The thin plate ring member 771 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the driven displacement member 773 and the raised portion from the main body plate portion 702 . We aim to make the operation smooth.

The front lid member 772 is configured as a member having the same shape as the front lid member 762, and is provided with an opening 772a for wiring passage which is bored in a shape along the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. The electric wiring DK2 is passed through the opening 772a in the front-rear direction, guided to the guide portion 765, and connected to the connector portion 764a of the electrical board 764. As shown in FIG.

The long opening 774 receives the cylindrical fastening portion 766 of the driven displacement member 763 from the front side, receives the collar C1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 766 from the rear side, and is formed at the tip of the cylindrical fastening portion 766. A screw with a flange is screwed into the female screw. In this state, the flange of the flanged screw prevents the collar C1 from coming off, so that the coupling means 770 is supported by the supported means 760 so as not to fall off.

The arcuate protrusion 775 is disposed so as to be able to abut against the left and right end lower stoppers 719, and this abutment defines the end of rotation of the coupling means 770, which will be described later in detail.

The production means 780 includes a production base member 781 in which a plurality of legs 782 protruding to the rear side are fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720, and a size that covers the outer shape of the production base member 781 and is fastened and fixed from the front side. and a lower shielding member 788 fastened and fixed to the rear side of the lower half of the production base member 781 to block the line of sight from below.

The production base member 781 includes a disk-shaped main body plate portion 781a and a plurality of legs arranged toward the back side of the main body plate portion 781a with a gap slightly longer than the lateral width of the vertically long portion of the spring cover SC1. 782, an electrical board 783 that has an LED (light emitting means) that emits light to the front side and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body plate section 781; A plurality of connection terminals 784 configured to be connectable with the wiring DK3, and a plurality of insertion openings 785 formed in the body plate portion 781a are provided.

The insertion openings 785 include an assembly opening 785a formed near the center of the main body plate portion 781a in a range that includes the connection terminal 784 when viewed from the rear, and a pair of left and right regulation openings formed in the radial outer portion of the main body plate portion 781a. and an opening 785b. The restriction opening 785b functions as an opening for restricting the arrangement of the electric wiring DK3, and the details thereof will be described later.

The decorative member 786 is configured by stacking a plurality of members. That is, a diffusion member that diffuses light and a design member that is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and that forms a design shape when viewed from the front are stacked. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation by the light emitted from the light emitting means of the electrical decoration board 783 .

The lower shielding member 788 is a member that shields the line of sight from below (the line of sight when the player looks up from the third pattern display device 81 upward), The purpose is to prevent the urging means 750 from being seen from below in the standby state, which will be described later in detail.

50, 51 and 52 are front views of the second operating unit 700. FIG. FIGS. 50, 51 and 52 illustrate how the displaceable base member 720 of the second motion unit 700 is displaced from the rising end position to the falling end position in chronological order. 50, 51 and 52, illustration of the electrical decoration board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 50 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the end position of the rise, and FIG. 52, the displaceable base member 720 is shown in the lowered end position.

FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the left and right end lower stoppers 719 and the arcuate projections 775 (see FIG. 46) of the connecting means 770 start contacting each other. That is, the end position of the section in which the posture of the driven displacement member 763 is maintained during the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 is illustrated, and the displacement base member 720 descends beyond the state shown in FIG. Along with the displacement, the attitude of the driven displacement member 763 changes (see FIG. 52).

When the terminal gear 745 rotates until the displaceable base member 720 is positioned at the lowered terminal position, the eccentric post 746 enters the curved portion 744 a of the transmission hole 744 . The curved shape portion 744a is formed as an opening curved along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the terminal gear 745 in the state shown in FIG. , the posture of the rotating arm member 743 is maintained.

That is, if the curved portion 744a is used as a deceleration section until the terminal gear 745 stops, even if the terminal gear 745 is rotated at high speed and the displacement base member 720 is displaced vertically at high speed, the terminal gear Displacement base member 720 can be prevented from displacing during deceleration of 745 . Therefore, after performing the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 at high speed, it can be accurately stopped at the lower end position (rapidly stopped).

Further, when the terminal gear 745 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the lowering terminal position, while the eccentric column portion 746 advances on the curved portion 744a at the start of rotation, the rotational The posture of the moving arm member 743 is maintained, and resistance due to the weight of the rotating arm member 743 is not applied. Therefore, the magnitude required as the driving force when the drive motor 731 starts to be driven can be kept small.

In addition, the curved portion 744a has a length that restricts the eccentric column portion 746 from continuing to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, of the positions where the eccentric column 746 can be displaced (positions on the circumference centered on the rotation axis of the terminal gear 745), the eccentric column 746 is located in a range on the side closer to the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 743. is arranged, the length is such that the eccentric column portion 746 cannot be included inside.

As a result, even if the terminating gear 745 cannot be decelerated and rotates further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 743 can be avoided from being displaced upward.

The electrical wiring DK2 guided to the front side through the upper left corner of the opening 772a of the front lid member 772 disposed on the front side of the left opening 714a is attached to the fixing shape portion 718 of the upper left and right end stoppers 717 with a binding band or the like. , extends from the fixing shape portion 718 to the guide portion 765 with a margin of length, and is fixed to the guide portion 765 with a fastener such as a binding band.

The electric wiring DK2 is guided in the direction toward the opening 765a through the inner side of the path portion 765b. Consistent (through the axis of rotation). That is, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is guided to the supported means 760 from the rotational radial direction of the supported means 760 .

As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring DK2 due to the rotational displacement of the supported means 760 (the load in the tensile direction and the load in the compression direction) is equally generated regardless of the rotational direction of the supported means 760. be able to. That is, the load applied to the electrical wiring DK2 due to the rotational displacement of the supported means 760 can be made uniform, so the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved.

50 to 51, the end of the electric wire DK2 connected to the supported means 760 (hereinafter also referred to as the connection end of the electric wire DK2) is displaced in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the vertical movement of FIGS. 51 to 52, the connection end portion of the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced in a direction including a lateral component as the supported means 760 changes its posture. Displacement of the connection end of the electrical wiring DK1 will be described.

51 to 52, the displacement base member 720 is lowered by the first distance L1, while the movement distance of the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is shortened to the second distance L2 (L1>L2 ). In other words, by reducing the amount of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2, it is possible to reduce the load that may be applied to the electrical wiring DK2, so that disconnection of the electrical wiring DK2 can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, by shortening the amount of displacement of the electric wiring DK2, the movement range of the electric wiring DK2 can be easily kept within the range hidden by the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13, so that the electric wiring DK2 can be used for the game. Since it can be made difficult for a person to visually recognize, it is possible to make it easier to dispose the electric wiring DK2 closer to the front side.

Further, the connection end portion of the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced upward while the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward. As a result, an upward load opposite to the downward load caused by inertia in the electric wire DK2 when stopping the displacement base member 720 that has been displaced downward can be applied to the electric wire DK2 in advance. Therefore, the load that may be applied to the electric wiring DK2 can be offset, and the fatigue applied to the electric wiring DK2 can be reduced.

The state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the lower end position is the state in which the connection end of the electrical wiring DK2 is farthest from the fixing forming portion 718, and a large tensile load is likely to occur on the electrical wiring DK2. In this case, the guide straight line D1 that coincides with the direction in which the electrical wiring DK2 is guided to the supported means 760 approaches the fixing formation portion 718 .

As a result, in a state in which the connection end portion of the electric wire DK2 is farthest from the fixing formation portion 718, the electric wire DK2 can be arranged in a state in which the electric wire DK2 extends straight from the fixing formation portion 718 to the connection end portion of the electric wire DK2. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the load in the pulling direction from being applied to the electric wiring DK2.

In this way, the rotational displacement of the supported means 760 favorably acts on the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2. Only the left supported means 760L may be rotationally displaced, and the right supported means 760R may be fixed to the displacement base member 720. FIG. In this case, the second action unit 700 can create a left-right asymmetrical action effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by causing the displacement of the supported means 760 to be left-right symmetrical, the up-and-down movement of the second motion unit 700 can be caused with good left-right balance. Wobble of the member 720 can be suppressed. Furthermore, by causing the displacement of the pivotally supported means 760 to be left-right symmetrical, it is possible to improve the balance as an action presentation.

The driven displacement member 763 of the pivotally supported means 760 has a wiring fixing portion 763b formed so that a fixing member such as a binding band can be inserted therethrough in order to fix the electric wiring DK3 on the side close to the front cover member 762 .

The electrical wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of the electrical board 764, which is arranged on the opposite side of the front cover member 762 with respect to the portion fixed by the wiring fixing portion 763b.

Effects other than the effects described above as the effects of the curved portion 744a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 shows in chronological order how the rotating arm member 743 reciprocates around the lower end position of the displacement base member 720 .

53(a), 53(b) and 53(c) are front views of the rotating arm member 743 and the terminating gear 745. FIG. In FIG. 53(a), the eccentric column portion 746 enters the curved shape portion 744a, and the rotating arm member 743 moves to the position where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the lower end position (hereinafter referred to as the rotating arm member 743). 53(b), the terminal gear 745 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 51), and in FIG. 53(c), the rotating arm member 743 is displaced downward by the self-weight of the displacement base member 720, and the rotating arm member 743 disposed at the lower end position is illustrated. be done.

The changes in time series as shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c) are controlled, for example, by intentionally releasing the driving force after the driving force of the drive motor 731 is generated in one direction. can occur in some cases.

That is, the driving motor 731 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 53(a) to the state shown in FIG. 53(b), and when the state shown in FIG. When the rotating arm member 743 is displaced downward to the final position of the downward movement, the state shown in FIG. 53(c) is reached.

In the state shown in FIG. 53(c), the terminating gear 745 is shown as a result of being driven by the downward displacement of the rotating arm member 743 due to its own weight, not by the driving force of the drive motor 731. 746 has not entered the curved shape portion 744a.

Therefore, since the above-described rebound prevention function that occurs when the eccentric column portion 746 enters the curved portion 744a does not occur, the rotating arm member 743 rebounds and displaces ( bound displacement).

That is, in the present embodiment, the rebound displacement is caused when the rotating arm member 743 is placed at the lowering end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 and when the rotating arm member 743 is placed at the lowering end position by its own weight. Since the easiness of (bound displacement) can be changed, the operation of the rotating arm member 743 can be made unexpected.

Here, the displacement due to its own weight and the operating speed tend to be non-uniform compared to a controllable mode such as the operation of the driving motor 731 . In addition, variations are likely to occur due to uncertain circumstances such as the sliding resistance and the installation angle of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). For example, the rotating arm member 743 may move downward at high speed due to the weight of the displacement base member 720 or the like, or may move downward slightly slowly.

When the downward displacement of the rotating arm member 743 occurs at high speed, the eccentric column portion 746 is similarly displaced vigorously. If it abuts against the inner surface of the longitudinal end of the eccentric column 746, the load applied from the transmission hole 744 to the eccentric column 746 increases, and the eccentric column 746 may break early.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric column portion 746 only enters the curved shape portion 744a when the rotating arm member 743 is arranged at the lowering end position, and the inner surface of the longitudinal end portion of the transmission hole 744 remains. Since contact with the eccentric column portion 746 does not occur, the durability of the eccentric column portion 746 can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that repeatedly causes changes along the time series shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), the drive mode for changing from the state of FIG. 53(a) to the state of FIG. 53(b) is intermittently changed. should be generated in As a result, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the supported means 760 (see FIG. 38) repeats vertical reciprocating displacement in small steps.

54 is a front view of the second operating unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 54, the displaceable base member 720 is illustrated in its lowered end position. It should be noted that, in FIG. 54, illustration of the electrical decoration board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 54 shows a state in which the supported means 760 is displaced upward compared to the state shown in FIG. That is, compared to the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line in the state shown in FIG. 52, the inclination angle of the supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line is larger in the state shown in FIG.

A condition such as that shown in FIG. 54 would occur, for example, if the displaceable base member 720 were to be swooped down into a lowered end position. In this case, the displacement base 720 is maintained at the lower end position due to the above-described anti-rebound effect, while inertia acts on the supported means 760 to continue displacement while changing the tilt angle. , only the supported means 760 will be displaced.

Here, as long as the inertial acceleration acting on the supported means 760 is smaller than the acceleration due to its own weight, only the supported means 760 is not displaced, and the displacement base member 720 is maintained at the lower end position. Similarly, the pivoted means 760 are maintained in the arrangement shown in FIG.

That is, depending on the descending speed of the displaceable base member 720, when the arrangement of the supported means 760 is maintained after the displaceable base member 720 reaches the descent terminal position (low descending speed), and when the displaceable base member 720 It is possible to construct a case where the supported means 760 is displaced due to inertia after reaching the descent end position (high descent speed). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

Even when the state shown in FIG. 52 changes to the state shown in FIG. 54, the connection end of the electric wire DK2 is displaced upward, which is the fixing shape portion 718 side, so that the electric wire DK2 is excessively pulled. can be avoided.

Here, when the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward at high speed, the inertia of the electric wiring DK2 becomes greater, and the electric wiring DK2 is more likely to protrude downward. Since the connection end portion of the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced further upward compared to the case of displacement, the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced downwardly against the downward load caused by inertia when the displaceable base member 720 that has been downwardly displaced is stopped. The upward load previously applied to the wiring DK2 can be increased.

Therefore, even if the load due to inertia that can be applied to the electric wiring DK2 is large, it can be sufficiently offset by the upward load that is previously applied to the electric wiring DK2, thereby reducing the fatigue applied to the electric wiring DK2. be able to.

The feature of displacing the connection end portion of the electrical wiring DK2 upward by the displacement of the supported means 760 functions effectively when the electrical wiring DK2 needs to be loosened. This is particularly useful when there are multiple variations in displacement of the pivot means 760 .

That is, when there are a plurality of variations in the displacement of the supported means 760, since the tensile load generated in the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed by the entire arrangement of the supported means 760, the supported means that minimizes the slack of the electrical wiring DK2. In comparison with the arrangement of 760 (see FIG. 54), other arrangements of the supported means 760 (see FIGS. 51 and 52) result in greater slack in the electrical wiring DK2.

Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the electric wiring DK2 is likely to be excessively displaced due to inertial force in an arrangement where the slackness of the electric wiring DK2 becomes large, and there is a high possibility that the electric wiring DK2 will be visually recognized by the player, which may hinder the performance. .

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if the supported means 760 is displaced so as to generate a load in a direction that cancels out the inertial load that can be applied to the electric wire DK2, the electric wire DK2 is displaced. Even if the supported means 760 is controlled to be stopped in an arrangement that increases slack, it is possible to easily suppress excessive displacement of the electric wire DK2 due to inertial force, so that the electric wire DK2 can be visually recognized by the player. can be lessened.

In this embodiment, the limit position of displacement of the supported means 760 due to inertia is defined by the relationship with the connecting means 770 . That is, as shown in FIG. 54, the rotation upper end position of the supported means 760 is set as the position where the cylindrical fastening portion 766 is arranged at the end of the elongated opening 774 of the connecting means 770 . That is, the supported means 760 is configured to be rotationally displaceable between the tilt angle shown in FIG. 52 and the tilt angle shown in FIG.

In other words, the connecting means 770 prevents excessive positional displacement of the supported means 760 due to inertia, thereby maintaining a low load on the electric wiring DK2 in the operating range of the supported means 760. Can be limited to a range.

In this way, the connecting means 770 has the function of providing a time difference between the displacement period of the displacement base member 720 and the rotational displacement period of the supported means 760. In addition, the connecting means 770 has the function of providing the displacement of the supported means 760 to the electrical wiring DK2. It has the ability to limit to the range where the is kept low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be improved by the member that enables execution of the motion presentation with a time lag.

In this embodiment, there is a displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the lowering end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 (see FIG. 52), and a displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the lowering end position by its own weight (see FIG. 53). ) can operate the second operating unit 700 .

In addition, as the displacement modes of the supported means 760 after the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position, a displacement mode in which the attitude at the time when the displacement base member 720 reaches the lowering end position is maintained; The second operation unit 700 can be operated in a displacement mode in which the displacement continues due to inertia even after the base member 720 reaches the lowering end position.

Of the control methods for intentionally selecting and generating these displacement modes, another method for adjusting the speed of the downward displacement described above will be described.

Since the displacement base member 720 is configured to be displaceable between the rising terminal position and the lowering terminal position, by adjusting the length of time from reaching the lowering terminal position to starting upward displacement, it is possible to The displacement mode of the pivot means 760 can be adjusted.

For example, if the time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the lower end position to when it starts to move upward is short, a load in the rotational direction pushing back the supported means 760 is generated, and the inertial force of the supported means 760 is canceled out. Therefore, the displaceable base member 720 is displaced upward without excessive rotational displacement of the supported means 760 (without taking the posture shown in FIG. 54).

On the other hand, for example, if the time from when the displaceable base member 720 reaches the lower end position to when it starts to move upward is long, the supported means 760 is excessively rotationally displaced by the inertia force (the posture shown in FIG. 54 and the ), the supported means 760 will be excessively rotationally displaced by inertia force, and will return to the lower end position of rotation by gravity before being displaced. The base member 720 is displaced upward.

In this way, by adjusting the length of time from when the displaceable base member 720 reaches the lower end position to when it starts to be displaced upward, the displacement mode of the supported means 760 can be adjusted.

FIG. 55 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along line LV-LV in FIG. In FIG. 55, the electrical decoration board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780, which are omitted in FIG. 50, are shown without omission.

As shown in FIG. 55, the electrical wiring DK3 is a pair of electrical wirings arranged substantially symmetrically. Description is omitted.

The electric wiring DK3 is arranged to be inserted through a plurality of locations of the displacement base member 720 from the back side, one end is connected to the connector portion 764a through the opening 724a from the back side, and the other end is It is connected to the connection terminal 784 through the long opening 728a from the rear side. Since the opening 724a and the elongated opening 728a are formed at positions that are blocked by the effect means 780 when viewed from the front in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK3 from being visually recognized by the player when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the connector portion 764a side will be described as the upstream side of the electrical wiring DK3, and the connection terminal 784 side will be described as the downstream side of the electrical wiring DK3.

The electrical wiring DK3 is fixed in arrangement on the downstream side. In other words, it is only the upstream side of the opening 724a that needs to be displaced under the influence of the operation of other components in the electrical wiring DK3. That is, the electric wire DK3 is displaced due to the displacement of the connector portion 764a caused by the rotational displacement of the supported means 760. As shown in FIG.

Here, since the electrical wiring DK3 is supported by the opening 724a as the rotating shaft of the supported means 760, it is assumed that the electrical wiring DK3 is subjected to a load in the tensile direction as the supported means 760 rotates. can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, since the electric wiring DK3 is arranged in the corner (concave) of the opening 762a of the front cover member 762 arranged on the front side of the opening 724a, it is arranged in the circular opening. Placement within 762a is limited. As a result, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the electric wiring DK3 rubs against the edge of the opening 762a, so that the durability of the electric wiring DK3 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, compared to the case where the electric wiring DK3 is arranged without passing through the rear side of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784, the displacement of the electric wiring DK3 is reduced. Since it is possible to limit the range to be pulled and to avoid the occurrence of a tensile load in that range, it is possible to improve the durability of the electrical wiring DK3.

When the electric wiring DK3 is arranged without passing through the rear side of the displacement base member 720 and connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784, the electric wiring DK3 is guided from the connector portion 764a toward the front side. Therefore, in order to avoid interference with the supported means 760, it is necessary to fix the electrical wiring DK3 at a plurality of points.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK3 is guided to the rear end side. That is, since the electrical wiring DK3 is guided away from the supported means 760, the possibility of interference between the supported means 760 and the electrical wiring DK3 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of separate fixing means such as binding bands to be provided, thereby reducing the number of man-hours and the material cost.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring DK3 on the downstream side will be described. The electric wiring DK3 passes through the elongated opening 728a, passes through the outside of the U-shaped projecting portion 728b (opposite side of the spring cover SC1), passes through the regulation opening 785b of the effect means 780, and is connected to the connection terminal 784. .

By arranging them in this way, it is possible to avoid interference between the electrical wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, the electric wire DK3 is restricted from being displaced toward the spring cover SC1 by the U-shaped projecting portion 728b and the main body plate portion 781a (see FIG. 48). Even if the electric wiring DK3 is not fixed by the fixing member, it is possible to avoid interference between the electric wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1.

56 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 along the LVI-LVI line in FIG. 50, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 along the LVII-LVII line in FIG. 51, and FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52;

That is, FIG. 56 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the end position of the rise, FIG. 57 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at an intermediate position, and FIG. 720 is shown positioned in the lowered end position. FIGS. 56 to 58 illustrate the decorative member 768 and effecting means 780 which are omitted from FIGS. 50, 51 and 52. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the coil spring SP1 turns around the flanged tubular member 751 and extends downward so as to pass through the front side of the displacement base member 720 at the center of the left and right. It is fixed to the protruding fastening portion 722 of the displacement base member 720 .

A spring cover SC1 is arranged on the front side of the coil spring SP1, and the line of sight from the short side of the spring cover SC1 is a side wall SC1a projecting from the short side edge of the spring cover SC1 to the rear side. shielded by Therefore, the spring cover SC1 can hide the coil spring SP1.

Since the coil spring SP1 is a member that applies a biasing force to the displacement base member 720, it preferably extends in the moving direction (vertical direction) of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the center (horizontal center) of the displacement base member 720.

On the other hand, when disposing a member (for example, the metal slide rail 711 in this embodiment) for guiding the movement direction of the displacement base member 720, the same arrangement is preferable, but either one is preferred to avoid interference. Countermeasures were taken by arranging them off the center or by arranging them both off the center by the same degree.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the spring cover SC1 is configured to be able to enter between the displacement base member 720 and the effect means 780, and the coil spring SP1 is hidden by the spring cover SC1. Since the coil spring SP1 can be arranged between the displacement base member 720 and the effect means 780 while avoiding the situation that is seen by the player, the metal slide rail 711 can be arranged on the back side of the displacement base 720 to prevent the coil spring SP1 from being seen by the player. Interference with can be easily avoided.

As a result, the flexibility of arrangement of the metal slide rail 711 can be improved, so that both the coil spring SP1 and the metal slide rail 711 can be connected to the center position of the displacement base member 720 in the left-right direction.

The spring cover SC1 is arranged within the minimum necessary range. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the projecting fastening portion 722 as the connection end portion of the coil spring SP1 can be displaced beyond the forming range of the spring cover SC1.

That is, unlike the case where the entire arrangement range of the coil spring SP1 is covered, the spring cover SC1 is not designed to avoid exposure of the coil spring SP1 by itself, but the spring cover is extended to a range where exposure can be avoided by other members. The design concept is not to form SC1.

According to this embodiment, even in the range where the spring cover SC1 is omitted, the effect means 780 is arranged on the front side so as to partially overlap the spring cover SC1 in a front view. can prevent exposure of the coil spring SP1.

By designing in this way, the vertical length of the spring cover SC1 can be shortened, and the material cost can be reduced. In addition, as will be described later, the lower end of the spring cover SC1 and the lower shielding member 788 of the effect means 780 overlap when viewed in the direction of movement of the effect means 780, so that the displacement range of the effect means 780 by the spring cover SC1 is increased. may be restricted, the degree of restriction can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the upper end position, the player often looks up at the second motion unit 700 from the front side. As described above, the spring cover SC1 is designed to prevent the coil spring SP1 from being exposed when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as can be seen from the fact that the side wall SC1a is not provided at the lower end of the spring cover SC1 for the purpose of widening the arrangement range of the coil spring SP1, the shielding function of the spring cover SC1 does not function when viewed upward. is not enough.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 56 is the standby state of the second operation unit 700, which is likely to be maintained for the longest time. It is important to configure Also, if the degree of line-of-sight shielding is low, when the vicinity of the coil spring SP1 is reflected and reflected on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), it may be seen by the player, which may reduce the performance effect. .

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower shielding member 788 of the effect means 780 is arranged over a wide range of left and right under the spring cover SC1 and the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 48). can be improved.

In addition, since the lower shielding member 788 is arranged up to a position close to the front end of the displacement base member 720, the coil spring SP1 and the spring cover SC1 are arranged on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). You can avoid being reflected.

The spring cover SC1 is not limited to a member whose state is fixed. For example, a part of the spring cover SC1 may be fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720 so that it can be expanded and contracted as the displacement base member 720 is displaced. As an implementation method, an example of forming the spring cover SC1 with a flexible material that expands and contracts, or forming a bellows shape with cloth or the like is exemplified.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the spring cover SC1 is configured as a fixed plate member, so that it is possible to avoid applying displacement resistance to the displacement base member 720 from the spring cover SC1. Thereby, the driving force required for displacement of the displacement base member 720 can be reduced.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the decorative portion arranged inside (lower side) of the boundary wall portion 86b is fixed to the center frame 86. However, the center frame 2086 of the second embodiment corresponds to the decorative portion. A decorative member 2086f is configured to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

59(a) and 59(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment along line XX in FIG. FIG. 59(a) illustrates a state in which the solenoid 2086d is de-energized, and FIG. 59(b) illustrates a state in which the solenoid 2086d is energized.

Note that the glass unit 2016 in this embodiment is formed so as to protrude toward the front side at least on the front side of the third pattern display device 81, unlike the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment.

That is, the glass unit 2016 includes a rear glass unit 2016a arranged to face the base plate 60 at least on the front side of the game area so as to constitute the front side wall surface of the ball passage, and a front frame so as to cover the window part 14c. 14 is obliquely fixed to the front glass unit 2016b.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the center frame 2086 includes, in addition to the configuration of the center frame 86 described above in the first embodiment, a solenoid 2086d arranged below the boundary wall portion 86b, A displacement portion 2086e fixed to the tip of the displacement side of the plunger of the solenoid 2086d and provided with an L-shaped opening, and a decoration arranged displaceably inside (lower side) of the boundary wall portion 86b and having a decorative shape. A member 2086f (corresponding to the decorative portion), and a connecting portion 2086g that projects from the end portion of the decorative member 2086f in parallel with the rotation axis in a columnar shape and is connected to the displacement portion 2086e by being inserted through the opening of the displacement portion 2086e. Mainly provide

The solenoid 2086d is arranged so that the plunger moves up and down. When energized, the solenoid 2086d is energized, causing the plunger to extend upward. Return to the bottom with force.

The displacement portion 2086e has an L-shaped opening, which includes an elongated hole 2086e1 elongated in the front-rear direction and an auxiliary hole 2086e2 extending upward from the front end of the elongated hole 2086e1. Prepare. The thickness of the long hole 2086e1 and the auxiliary hole 2086e2 are configured to be slightly longer than the diameter of the connecting portion 2086g. Thereby, the connecting portion 2086g can be configured to move the L-shaped opening.

The auxiliary hole 2086e2 is configured such that the coupling portion 2086g is arranged when the solenoid 2086d is in a non-excited state. As a result, the load applied to the displacement portion 2086e via the connecting portion 2086g due to the displacement of the decorative member 2086f can be directed in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the plunger of the solenoid 2086d can be displaced. Wobble can be suppressed.

The decorative member 2086f is rotatably supported on the left-right axis at the inner position (lower position) of the center frame 2086, and rotates at an angle exceeding 90 degrees when the solenoid 2086d is energized (Fig. 59(b)). In this way, the width of the blind spot of the line of sight YE3 can be changed by displacing the decorative member 2086f.

That is, before the solenoid 2086d is energized (see FIG. 59(a)), not only the boundary wall portion 86b but also the decorative member 2086f intersect the line of sight YE3. It became difficult to see the rear side of the wall portion 86b (corresponding to the shielded range SE1), and the blind spot was wide.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2086b is energized and energized (see FIG. 59(b)), the decorative member 2086f is positioned outside the line of sight YE3. A part of the shielded range SE1 can be visually recognized through the screen.

That is, when only the boundary wall portion 86b as the light-transmissive thin plate portion intersects the line of sight YE3, the visibility does not deteriorate so much that the rear side of the boundary wall portion 86b in the line of sight YE3 becomes invisible as a blind spot. The shielded range SE1 can be visually recognized well.

Thus, according to this embodiment, by driving the solenoid 2086b, it is possible to change the blind spot range through the boundary wall portion 86b and the decorative portion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the game area is configured such that there is a possibility that the profit obtained by the player changes due to the change in the visibility of the ball rolling on the upper part of the boundary wall portion 86b, By controlling to drive the solenoid 2086b, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game.

That is, in order to see the ball rolling on the upper part of the boundary wall 86b, it is required to move the position of the head to the vicinity of the boundary wall 86b (to the vicinity of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1)). Compared to the case where the player is forced to play the game in an awkward posture, this embodiment in which the shielded range SE1 can be visually recognized with the normal eye placement can improve the comfort of the game. .

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where a gap is provided to avoid contact between the spring cover SC1 and the displacement base member 720 has been described. It abuts the member 3720 and functions as a member that guides the displacement base member 3720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

60(a) and 61 are front views of the second operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a front perspective view of the small-diameter collar C3. In FIGS. 60(a) and 61, illustration of the electrical decoration board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 60(a) shows a state in which the displacement base member 3720 is arranged in the assembly preparation position arranged below the spring cover SC3, and FIG. 61 shows a state in which the displacement base member 3720 is arranged in the lowered end position. is illustrated.

In Figure 60(a), the displacement base member 3720 is positioned below the lower end position. That is, one feature of this embodiment is that the displacement base member 3720 is assembled by placing the displacement base member 3720 below the lowering end position and then raising it to the lowering end position. This will be explained below.

First, differences between the rotating arm member 3743 of the transmission means 3740 and the rotating arm member 743 in the first embodiment will be described. The rotary arm member 3743 does not have the connecting column portion 743b (see FIG. 43), and a through hole slightly larger than the female screw of the connecting column portion 743b is drilled at a corresponding position, and has an outer shape similar to that of the collar C1. A similar narrow collar C3 is provided (see FIG. 61).

A fastening screw inserted through the through-hole of the small-diameter collar C3 is screwed into a female screw formed at the distal end of the rotating arm member 3743 (base position of the connection column portion 743b before omitting), so that the small-diameter Collar C3 is supported by pivot arm member 3743 .

With this configuration, the long opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720 and the rotation arm member 3743 are not connected before the small-diameter collar C3 is assembled to the rotation arm member 3743, so the displacement base member 3720 is lowered. It can be placed in a ready-to-assemble position, which is a position below the end position.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 61, the displaceable base member 3720 is mounted in a state where the assembling of the supported means 760 to the displacement base member 3720 and the assembling of the connecting means 770 to the supported means 760 and the fixed base member 701 are completed. can be placed in the ready-to-assemble position. As a result, the degree of freedom of assembly order can be improved.

After disposing the displaceable base member 3720 at the assembly preparation position, by raising it to the descent end position, it is possible to engage the configuration of the upper end portion of the displaceable base member 3720 with the spring cover SC3. With the collar C3 inserted through the elongated opening 723, the fastening screw inserted through the small-diameter collar C3 is fastened and fixed to the rotating arm member 3743. As described in the first embodiment, the displacement base member 3720 is Displacement downward from the descent end position can be regulated.

In other words, the displacement base member 3720 can be placed in the assembly preparation position only before assembly, and can be prevented from being placed in the assembly preparation position after assembly is completed. This can reduce the possibility of unintentionally releasing the engagement between the configuration of the upper end of the displacement base member 3720 and the spring cover SC3.

The spring cover SC3 is made of a light-impermeable resin or metal material, and is recessed in parallel along the vertical direction at the left and right end portions of the vertical elongated portion SC3a disposed on the front side of the displacement base member 3720. It mainly includes a pair of guide recessed portions SC3b and left and right extended portions SC3c extending from the upper ends of the upper and lower elongated portions SC3a to the left and right sides.

The guide concave portion SC3b functions as a portion that receives the roller member 3729 of the displacement base member 3720 and guides the displacement of the displacement base member 3720 in the vertical direction.

The displacement base member 3720 includes a pair of roller members 3729 that are rotatably supported at left-right symmetrical positions on the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 721 and that have a roller-like annular shape. This roller member 3729 is arranged so as to be able to engage with the guide recess SC3b when the displacement base member 3720 is displaced from the assembly preparation position (see FIG. 60(a)) to the lowering end position (see FIG. 61). .

As a result, as the displacement base member 3720 is vertically displaced, the roller member 3729 comes into contact with the guide concave portion SC3b and rolls, thereby creating an operating resistance (friction) between the spring cover SC3 and the displacement base member 3720. resistance) can be reduced.

The left and right extended portions SC3c are in contact with the upper ends of the roller members 3729 when the displacement base member 3720 is arranged in an appropriate posture at the end position of the rise (the position and posture where the displacement base member 720 is arranged in FIG. 50). are arranged so as to be accessible.

This allows the left and right extension portions SC3c to function as portions that correct the posture of the displaceable base member 3720. FIG. That is, although the displaceable base member 3720 is restrained from being displaced by the engagement of the roller member 3729 and the guide concave portion SC3b and the metal slide rail 711 (see FIG. 56), deterioration of the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711 is prevented. For other reasons, the displaceable base member 3720 may tilt left and right in a front view.

If the up-and-down displacement of the displacement base member 3720 is repeated while the posture is changed, an extra load is applied to the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711, and there is a high possibility that the deterioration will progress further, so that the original posture can be restored. is preferred.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the upward end position in an appropriate posture, the upper end portion of the roller member 3729 is configured to be able to abut on the left and right extension portions SC3c. When the base member 3720 is tilted left and right, a large load (downward load) applied from the left and right extended portions SC3c to the roller member 3729 on the higher side can be ensured.

Therefore, the posture change of the displaceable base member 3720 can be returned to the appropriate posture side by the downward load generated from the left and right extended portions SC3c. That is, since the posture of the displacement base member 3720 can be restored every time the displacement base member 3720 is placed at the end position of the upward movement, it is possible to avoid the situation where the displacement base member 3720 is repeatedly moved up and down while the posture is changed. can be made easier.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, before the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide concave portion SC3b, there is no need to arrange the electric wires DK2 and DK3, so the assembling work can be easily performed.

The work of arranging and connecting the electric wires DK2 and DK3 after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recess SC3b can be easily performed using the configuration described above in the first embodiment.

Due to the configuration, it is difficult to assemble the pivotally supported means 760 after connecting the rotating arm member 743 to the displacement base member 3720 (it is difficult to fasten the fastening screw), so the state shown in FIGS. , and the supported means 760 is considered to be in an assembled state. That is, the electrical decoration substrate 764 and the decorative member 768 (not shown) are also integrated, and the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 protrude from the left and right ends.

On the other hand, since the small-diameter collar C3 is assembled to the elongated opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720 later, the assembly of the effect means 780 to the displacement base member 3720 causes the roller member 3729 to engage with the guiding concave portion SC3b. will be done later.

At the lower end position of the displacement base member 3720 shown in FIG. ) are visible without being hidden, it is easy to insert the electric wires DK2 and DK3 through these portions.

For example, the electrical wiring DK2 can be arranged by engaging the roller member 3729 with the guiding recessed portion SC3b, fixing it to the fixing shaped portion 718, and assembling it so as to run it through the opening 772a to the rear side. good.

Further, for example, regarding the arrangement of the electric wiring DK3, the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK3 is protruded from the opening 762a to the front side in advance, and the effect means 780 is connected to the connection terminal 784 of the effect means 780 on the displacement base. It may be fastened and fixed to the member 3720 .

As another method for arranging the electric wiring DK3, the connecting end of the electric wiring DK3 is protruded from the opening 762a to the front side in advance, and after fastening and fixing the effect means 780 to the displacement base member 3720, the dedicated The connection end of the electrical wiring DK3 may be connected to the connection terminal 784 using a jig (not shown). According to this embodiment, a gap is formed between the effect means 780 and the displacement base member 3720 for allowing the spring cover SC3 to pass therethrough. 784 can be easily directed.

61, the displacement base member 3720 and the fixed base member 701 do not overlap each other when viewed from the front. , the displacement base member 3720 of the effect means 780 can be assembled.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the adjustment member 165 as a member that does not affect the shape of the flow-down path FL1 is arranged in the recessed portion 161e of the right side effect unit 160 has been described, but the right side effect unit 4160 of the fourth embodiment. Then, the member arranged in the concave portion 161e affects the shape of the sphere's flow-down path. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right effect unit 4160 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit 4160. FIG. The right effect unit 4160 is a unit provided with the variable winning device 65, and is fitted into the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. A ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable prize winning device 65 flows down a flow path formed on the back side of the right effect unit 4160 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right effect unit 4160 is connected to the base member 161, the first flow path member 162, and the downstream side of the first flow path member 163, and is connected to the front side of the ball flow path. and a switching device 4164 which is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the second flow path forming means 4163 and switches the flow path of the ball.

The second flow path forming means 4163 includes a semi-formed portion 4163a that opens toward the rear side and forms the front side surface of the flow-down path, and a right end portion of the semi-formed portion 4163a that is perforated so that a ball can pass through in the front-rear direction. A plurality of detection sensors having a through hole 4163b configured to communicate with the lower end of the semi-formed portion 161a, and a detection port through which the ball that is fitted to the semi-formed portion 4163a and flowed down the flow-down path can pass. SC1, SC2 and a tension designed for the purpose of forming a frame around the detection openings of the detection sensors SC1, SC2 so that the detection openings of the detection sensors SC1, SC2 can be arranged near the center of the flow path. It has protruding portions 4163c and a plurality of insertion holes 4163d which are formed at both left and right ends and configured to be able to pass through the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c corresponding to the arrangement.

The protruding portion 4163c is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the thickness dimension of the frame portions of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 on the back side for receiving the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and is formed to protrude toward the front side correspondingly.

A portion of the projecting portion 4163 that projects toward the front side is arranged in the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 in the state where the right side effect unit 4160 is assembled. That is, the concave portion 161e is likely to occur when the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are arranged as in the present embodiment, in addition to being used for arranging the plate-like adjusting member 165 as described in the first embodiment. It can be used for the purpose of arranging the projecting portion 4163c.

The switching device 4164 includes a rear blocking portion 4164a having a plate-like surface that closes the semi-formed portion 4163a from the rear side, and a ball guide portion 4164b projecting from the right end of the rear blocking portion 4164a toward the front side in a triangular shape when viewed from above. a receiving recess 4164c formed at the lower end of the rear blocking portion 4164a for receiving the detection sensors SC1 and SC2; A valve 4164d, a solenoid 4164e that drives the switching valve 4164d, a plurality of insertion holes 4164f configured to enable insertion of fastening screws that are screwed into the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c, and a second flow path. A plurality of insertion holes 4164g are provided so that fastening screws to be screwed into the component means 4163 can be inserted.

The sphere that has passed through the opening 4163b flows down between the semi-formed portion 4163a and the rear blocking portion 4164a. That is, the sphere flow-down path is formed between the opening 4163b and the rear blocking portion 4164a.

The ball guide portion 4164b is arranged close to the right inner surface of the opening 4163b, and is configured to be able to guide the ball that has passed through the opening 4163b on the inclined surface on the front side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the back side of the passage 4163b.

The switching valve 4164d is arranged above the detection sensor SC1 and changes its state between a regulating state for regulating the entry of the ball into the detection sensor SC1 and a guiding state for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SC1 withdrawing from above the detection sensor SC1. do.

That is, when the solenoid 4164e is in a non-excited state, the switching valve 4164d is in a regulated state, and the ball that has flowed down the flow path enters the detection sensor SC2. On the other hand, when the solenoid 4164e is energized, the switching valve 4164d is in the guiding state, and the ball that has flowed down the flow path enters the detection sensor SC1.

The detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are different from the prize ball detection sensor (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the specific prize winning port 65a (upstream side of the first flow path member 162), and can detect passage of the ball. and a non-specified area that does not change to a state advantageous to the player even if the passage of the ball is detected.

That is, the switching valve 4164d is set to be able to change its state in a plurality of patterns corresponding to the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a. For example, in the first state change pattern, the solenoid 4164e is de-energized at the timing when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball enters the detection sensor SC2 (non-specific area). On the other hand, in the pattern of the second state change, the solenoid 4164e is energized at the timing when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball is detected by the detection sensor SC1 (specific area). It is controlled to enter the ball.

In this way, by setting the state change pattern of the switching valve 4164d, it is possible to control the ball so that it hits either one of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, thereby varying the profit that the player can obtain. It is possible to configure the playability that can be done.

The recessed portion 161e can be used as a portion for arranging the overhanging portion 4163c in this embodiment or as a portion for arranging the adjustment member 165 of the first embodiment. Can be easily configured.

That is, even if the pachinko machine 10 constitutes a game property that can be realized by arranging the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 on the flow-down path as in the present embodiment, detection of detecting a prize ball on the flow-down path FL1 is performed. Even if an additional detection sensor other than the sensor is unnecessary, the base member 161 can be diverted when configuring the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, compared to the case of designing and manufacturing a new mold for manufacturing the base member 161, the product cost can be reduced.

When the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 4164f is fastened and fixed to the specific columnar fastening portion 161c or the columnar fastening portion 162c, the fastening force is not applied to the second flow path forming means 4163, and the second flow path forming means 4163 is configured to be slightly displaceable in the front-rear direction. That is, the second flow path forming means 4163 is configured so as to enable alignment by inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c through the insertion hole 4163d, but is configured not to fix the position. be.

The switching device 4164 and the second flow path forming means 4163 are fixed to each other by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 4164g into the second flow path forming means 4163 . As a result, the shape of the flow path on the downstream side of the passage port 4163b can be defined by the molding accuracy of the second flow path forming means 4163 and the switching device 4164. It is possible to avoid being influenced by molding accuracy.

As a result, the demand for molding accuracy is increased at locations where it is necessary to maintain high accuracy of the flow path shape (on the downstream side of the passage port 4163b) in order to affect the profits of the player, while at other locations ( It is possible to reduce the requirement for molding precision of the base member 161 and the first flow path member 162) that constitute the flow path on the upstream side of the passage port 4163b. In other words, it is possible to achieve the desired playability while reducing the number of parts that require high molding accuracy.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. In the first embodiment, the fixing position of the electrical wiring DK2 is such that the fixing shape portion 718 is fixed and the guide portion 765 and the connector portion 764a are displaceable. In the operation unit 5700, the fixing shape 5718 is configured to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

64 to 67 are front views of the second operating unit 5700 in the fifth embodiment. 64 to 67 show how the displacement base member 720 of the second operation unit 5700 is displaced from the rising end position to the falling end position in chronological order. 64 to 67, the electrical decoration board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780 are omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 64 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the end position of the rise, and FIG. 65 shows a state in which the base member 720 is arranged at a position midway between the end position of the rise and the end position of the fall. 66 and 67, the displaceable base member 720 is shown in the lowered end position.

FIG. 67 shows a state in which the supported means 760 is displaced upward compared to the state shown in FIG. 65, the inclination angle of the supported means 760 relative to the horizontal line is greater than that shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the upper left and right end stoppers 5717 and the shape fixing portion 5718 on the left side are configured as separate members from the fixing base member 5701, and the upper left and right end stoppers 5717 and the shape portion for fixing 5717 are provided at the left end of the fixing base member 5701. A solenoid SOL51 for generating a driving force for vertically displacing the 5718 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 64, when the solenoid SOL51 is not energized (non-excited state), the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 are located on the upper side surfaces of the driven displacement member 773 when the displacement base member 720 is positioned at the end position of the rise. It is placed at a position (lowered position) where it can come into contact with.

On the other hand, when the solenoid SOL51 is energized (excited state), the upper left and right end stoppers 5717 are arranged at a position (raised position) raised from the lowered position, as shown in FIG. In this manner, the left and right end upper stoppers 5717 are configured to be displaceable between the lowered position and the raised position.

Displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 accompanying displacement of the second operation unit 5700 will be described. 64 to 65, the distance between the fixing shape portion 5718 to which the electric wiring DK2 is fixed and the path portion 765b arranged near the connector portion 464a to which the electric wiring DK2 is fixed is shortened. is changing. Therefore, the electric wiring DK2 is likely to be excessively displaced downward due to the inertial force that is generated as the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward.

On the other hand, in FIG. 66, as described above, the electrical wire DK2 near the path portion 765b is pulled upward due to the change in the posture of the supported means 760, and in addition, the solenoid SOL51 is energized, and the fixing shape portion 5718 is pulled upward. is upwardly displaced, the portion of the electrical wiring DK2 fixed to the shape portion for fixing 5718 is pulled upward. Therefore, excessive downward displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 can be strongly suppressed.

Further, in FIG. 67, the energization of the solenoid SOL51 is released at the timing when the length of the electric wire DK2 pulled toward the center increases. As a result, the fixing shape portion 5718 can be arranged on the left side of the path portion 765b of the supported means 760. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the distance between the shape fixing portion 5718 and the path portion 765b can be shortened compared to the case where the shape portion 5718 for fixing is arranged at a position obliquely above the path portion 765b. As a result, excessive tensile force applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be avoided, and deterioration of the durability of the electrical wiring DK2 can be prevented.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the light emitted from the light source arranged on the rear side of the center frame 86 passes through the flat plate portion 86a to the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a substrate may be directly fixed to the center frame 86, and light emitted from light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the substrate may pass through the flat plate portion 86a to the front side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flat plate portion 86a is formed to have a smooth surface and has good light transmittance has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light diffusion shape may be formed on the flat plate portion 86a. As a result, the flat plate portion 86a can be made to emit light easily on the surface, so it is possible to perform a good light emission effect while reducing the number of light emitting means such as LEDs.

Although the case where the base plate 60 is formed as a wooden member has been described in the first embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the boundary wall portion 86b as a portion that blocks the line of sight of the player protrudes perpendicularly from the front of the base plate 60 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the boundary wall portion 86b may be configured to protrude in a direction having a component in the surface direction of the base plate 60 (for example, obliquely upward). In this case, a wide shielded range SE1 can be ensured.

In the first embodiment described above, the boundary wall portion 86b is formed as a strip-shaped wall portion having the same width, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the boundary wall portion 86b may be formed in a belt shape in which the length of the width changes depending on the position. In this case, it is possible to easily adjust the width of the shielded range SE1 for each arrangement.

In the above-described first embodiment, the boundary wall portion 86b blocks the view of the player. For example, a light guide plate (LED light guide panel) or a movable accessory may be used.

For example, the movable accessory is arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 in the standby state, and projects toward the front side toward the center frame 86 in the operating state so that the front side or the back side of the glass unit 16 is positioned on the center frame 86. may be displaced outward when viewed from the front. At this time, it may be configured to be displaced between the plurality of glass units 2016 and arranged on the front side of the center frame 2086 so as to block the player's line of sight toward the center frame 2086 .

Note that the means arranged in the shielded range SE1 is not limited at all. For example, a switching device (for example, a switching device 4164) that switches whether or not a game ball enters a specific area (an area that can change to a state advantageous to the player by entering a ball) may be arranged, A second winning port 640 having an electric accessory 640a and a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning port 65a may be arranged. In this case, the player's line of sight may be (partially) blocked at the timing when the game ball can enter the specific area, the second winning hole 640, or the specific winning hole 65a, making it difficult to see. In this case, the player's attention to the specific area, the second winning opening 640, and the specific winning opening 65a can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower plate portion 152 is formed with the ridge-shaped ridge portion 155 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may protrude from the lower plate portion 152 in granular form. In this case, since it is possible to easily generate a load in the longitudinal direction on the falling ball, the deceleration effect of the ball can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ridge portion 155 that produces the deceleration action projects upward from the lower surface portion, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to protrude from the base plate 60 toward the front side, or to provide a member on the glass unit 16 side and protrude from the member toward the back side. Also, the arrangement of the projecting shaped portion is not limited to the left side of the game area, and may be arranged in the right-handed channel.

Although the case where the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion part 155 is the same was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it may be formed in a shape (tapered shape) in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the back side. In this case, since a frontal load can be applied to the ball, discharge of the ball from the out port 71 can be delayed. Also, the size relationship of the cross-sectional shape may be reversed. In this case, the balls can be quickly discharged from the out port 71 .

In the former case, the shape of the protrusion 155 can form a draft toward the front side when the protrusion 155 is resin-molded. In the latter case, it is difficult to form by die-cutting to the front side. It can be manufactured easily by die-cutting to the upper surface side.

The degree of freedom in the shape of the protrusion 155 can be improved if the die-cutting to the upper surface side is taken into consideration. For example, the side of the above-described tapered cross-sectional shape with a larger cross-sectional shape can be alternately replaced by adjacent ridges. In this case, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the protrusion 155 can be given a reaction force that is repeatedly reversed back and forth, so that the stability of the game ball flowing down can be enhanced. Further, for example, the protrusion 155 may be a protrusion extending obliquely instead of a protrusion extending back and forth, or a protrusion extending in a wavy shape along the longitudinal direction of the lower plate portion 152 . It can also be used as an article.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second ridge portion 157 applies an obliquely upward load to the ball abutting from the downstream side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the portion of the lower plate portion 152 connected to the right end of the second ridge portion 157 in the shape of a bottom that is lowered by the radius of the sphere, the sphere can be brought into contact with the right side portion 156c. A rightward load can be applied to This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the ball runs up the second ridge portion 157 .

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the amount of projection of the second rib portion 157 on the downstream side is smaller than that of the first rib portion 156, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second projecting portion 157 on the downstream side may be configured to have a larger projecting amount than the first projecting portion 156 . In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to stay in the position between the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 .

In the first embodiment described above, the upper surface of the ridge portion 155 is formed of a smooth surface that easily reflects light, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light diffusion shape may be formed on the surface. In this case, the upper surface of the protrusion 155 can be surface-illuminated, and the attention of the protrusion 155 can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the light reflected by the opposing plate portion 153 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mirror-finished reflecting member may be provided in front of the opposing plate portion 153 .

Also, separate light emitting means for lighting the left effect unit 150 may be provided. For example, a (highly rigid or flexible) decorative board is provided in the gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 (a concave portion on the back side of the ridge portion 155 may be used), and the decorative board It may be configured so that light is emitted to the inside of the game area by light emitting means such as LEDs disposed in the electric accessory 640a, and an electric decoration board is provided on the electric accessory 640a to emit light to the left and right outside of the electric accessory 640a. may be configured to irradiate.

In this case, since the shadow of the sphere flowing down near the general winning opening 63 can be extended upward by irradiating the light toward the general winning opening 63, the area of the sphere is larger than the area of the sphere. Since the existence of the ball flowing down near the general winning opening 63 can be confirmed, the presence of the ball can be enhanced.

In addition, since the shadow of the general prize winning opening 63 can be extended upward, two different types of shadows, that is, the shadow (static) and the shadow of the sphere (moving) can be visually recognized. can be highlighted. As a result, attention to the general prize winning opening 63 can be improved.

Also, the separate light emitting means is not limited to being arranged on the electrical board. For example, a conductive adhesive is applied to the gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61, and the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 are attached in such a manner that the conductive adhesive is fixed to the contact of the LED. An LED may be arranged in the gap between them, and the LED may emit light by energizing the conductive adhesive. In this case, the function can be realized as long as there is a gap where the LED can be arranged, so the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 can be designed more freely.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball is guided from either the left or right side of the out port 71 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right sides of the out port 71 may be open so that the balls flow into the out port 71 from both the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where light is reflected on the front side of the opposing plate portion 153 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light emitted from a member (for example, the first operation unit 400) arranged on the back side of the general winning opening 63 may pass through the general winning opening 63 and reach the ball guide member 154. good. In this case, the light can be refracted downward by using the inclined surface provided inside the ball guide member 154 for the purpose of smoothing down the flow of the ball, and the light can reach the ridge portion 155 . Therefore, the projection 155 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting means.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 155 is arranged directly below the ball guide member 154 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the ball flowing down near the ball guide member 154 has a high velocity with a component in the left-right direction and tends to flow down, the protrusion 155 is provided at a position overlapping the ball guide member 154 when viewed in the direction of the velocity. can be In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from landing on the ridge portion 155 even when the ball flows down at a velocity having a horizontal component.

In the first embodiment described above, the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163 fastened and fixed to the base member 161 are combined only with the base member 161 to form the flow path FL1. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower part of the second flow path member 163 extends downward from the lower end of the base member 161, and the extended part is combined with another flow path member arranged opposite to the downflow path FL1. may be configured.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the adjustment member 165 is configured as a separate member from the first flow path member 162 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 165 and the first flow path member 162 may be configured as an integral body. In this case, the internal shape of the flow path FL1 can be maintained by configuring the portion connecting the adjustment member 165 and the first flow path member 162 to pass outside the flow path FL1.

In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration has been described in which the adjustment member 165 can be fixed to the base member 161 by fastening and fixing the second flow path member 163 to the base member 161, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate screws for fastening and fixing the adjustment member 165 may be prepared.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the fitting hole 165b is formed in the adjusting member 165 as the alignment of the second flow path member 163 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the fitting hole 165b or in addition to the fitting hole 165b, a wall portion that can contact the outer surface of the second flow path member 163 from the rear surface of the adjustment member 165 may be formed. As a result, the load received from the ball flowing down the flow-down path FL1 can be shared by the wall portion, so that deformation of the second flow path member 163 can be prevented. Further, by not forming a wall portion on the inner surface side of the second flow path member 163, it is possible to ensure the cross-sectional area of the region that constitutes the flow-down path FL1.

Although the back surface of the base member 161 and the back surface of the adjusting member 165 are flush with each other in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 165 may protrude from the rear surface of the base member 161 . In this case, when the second flow path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the base member 161, a compressive load can be applied to the adjustment member 165, so the positional stability of the adjustment member 165 can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation unit 500 that accommodates and displaces the drive motor 541 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement mode of the accessory that accommodates the drive device and is displaced may be a slide displacement, a combination of rotational displacement and slide displacement, or other complex displacements.

Moreover, although the case where the drive motor 541 is disposed inside the rotating body 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that it is fixed to the back side of the rotating body 560 and displaced vertically according to the vertical displacement of the rotating unit 500 . Even in this case, the rotor 560 can be configured to hide the drive motor 541 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the drive motor 541 having a diameter larger than that of the rotating body 560 can be employed.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the detection sensor 547 is arranged on the opposite side of the drive motor 541 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensor 547 may be arranged on the left side, the detection sensor 547 may be arranged outside the rotating body 560, the arrangement of the detection sensor 547 may be omitted, and the drive motor having the function of judging the angle may be used. 541 may be adopted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 547 is indirectly fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 so that the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 does not change has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by supporting the U-shaped metal plate 511 so as to be rotatably displaceable, the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 may be changed. In this case, the control for detecting a plurality of postures of the rotating body 560 (two postures in this embodiment, corresponding to the case of being placed in the raised position and the case of being placed in the lowered position) is diverted to It is possible to increase the visibility of the rotating body 560 . That is, as the position angle of the detection sensor 547 changes, the stop position (stop angle) of the rotating body 560 seen from the player changes, so that the visual recognition mode can be changed.

Note that the rotational displacement of the U-shaped metal plate 511 (change in the arrangement angle of the detection line s 547) may be implemented independently of the vertical position of the rotating body 560. It may be configured to be executable in conjunction with vertical displacement (depending on the vertical position).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 is oriented in the left-right direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rotary shaft may be oriented in the front-rear direction or the vertical direction, or the orientation of the rotary shaft may be changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical wiring DK1 may be fixed with an adhesive tape, or may be fixed with an adhesive or the like.

In the above-described first embodiment, the fixing positions (lower extension portion 519 and wire support portion 465) of the electrical wiring DK1 arranged on the lower side of the rotating unit 500 are arranged on the same plane perpendicular to the left-right direction. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixed position of the electric wiring DK1 may be arranged with a positional deviation in the left-right direction. In this case, compared to the case where the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged on the same plane, the degree of freedom in arranging the electrical wiring DK1 can be increased, and the winding state of the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily changed. . That is, since the electrical wiring DK1 is likely to spirally change its state, the diameter of the arc formed by the curved electrical wiring DK1 is reduced when the rotating unit 500 is arranged at the lowered position and the fixed positions are brought closer to each other. Since the reaction force received from the belt-like extension portion 463 can be reduced, the load received by the electric wiring DK1 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation unit 500 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating unit 500 may be displacement in the front-rear direction, displacement in the left-right direction, or displacement in an oblique direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide tubular portion 423 is inserted only through the front columnar member 431 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the provision of the guide tubular portion 423 may be omitted, or the guide tubular portions 423 may be provided on both of the pair of columnar members 431 .

In this case, the manner of arrangement of the guide tubular portion 423 may be varied for each of the four sets of left and right combined action units 402 . For example, when the rotating unit 500 is driven in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, the combined action unit 402 corresponding to the smaller number of reserved balls is operated more frequently than the combined action unit 402 corresponding to the larger number of reserved balls. Since the frequency of operation increases, it is assumed that deterioration is likely to occur at an early stage.

Therefore, only the compound action unit 402 corresponding to the smallest number of retained balls (compound action unit 402 at the left end) is provided with guide tubular portions 423 on both of the pair of columnar members 431 to reduce the vertical displacement resistance of the rotation unit 500. In order to reduce this, the other combined action units 402 may be provided with the guide tubular portion 423 only on the front columnar member 431 . As a result, the difference between the service life of the leftmost compound action unit 402 and the service life of the other compound action units 402 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front and rear surfaces of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b are formed flat has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved surface shape. Moreover, although the case where the intersection position of the extension line 517x is biased to the right side with respect to the center of the deformed hole 517 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intersection of the extension lines 517x may be positioned at the center of the deformed hole 517 .

In the first embodiment described above, the positioning pin 516c is arranged in the range between the pair of extension lines 517x, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the positioning pin 516c may be arranged outside the range between the pair of extension lines 517x (for example, on the left side of the fastening portion 516b). In this case, the arrangement width of the electric wiring DK1 can be secured.

Although the case where the fastening portions 517a of the guide member 516 are arranged separately has been described in the first embodiment, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be arranged so as to divide the deformed hole 517 . In this case, when there are a plurality of electric wires passing through the deformed hole 517, they can be supported by separate openings. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily guide the wiring arranged on the upper side through the deformed hole 517 in both the left and right directions of the guide member 516 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 517a protrudes inward of the deformed hole 517 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b may be formed from a circular opening in which the fastening portion 517a is omitted, and the fastening portion may be arranged outside the opening. In this case, the passing area of the electric wiring DK1 can be increased, so that the upper limit of the total cross-sectional area of the electric wiring DK1 can be increased.

In the first embodiment described above, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is formed up to an intermediate position in the depth direction of the deformed hole 517, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may have the same shape as the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b and may be formed to penetrate along the deformed hole 517 .

In the first embodiment, the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b is formed as the fan-shaped recessed portion in the deformed hole 517, but the shape of the recessed portion is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the concave portion may have a substantially rectangular shape with front and rear wall portions extending parallel to the left-right direction. In this case, the load applied to the electric wiring DK1 arranged in the recess can be reduced.

Further, in this case, when the member connected to the electric wire DK1 is displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement in the left-right direction of the electric wire DK1 accompanying the displacement can be guided by the concave portion. That is, since the recessed portion can guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1, the load applied to the electrical wiring DK1 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where a single fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b is formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of fan-shaped adjustment portions 517b can be set arbitrarily, and may be two, three, or four.

In the first embodiment described above, the detected portion 577 has a shape in which the annular protruding portion is divided, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding proximal end side of the detected portion 577 may be shaped so as not to be divided. In this case, the rigidity of the detected portion 577 can be improved, so that the rigidity of the rotating right lid portion 570 can be improved, and as a result, the rigidity of the rotating body 560 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is connected to the drive motor 541 and the rotating parts (the rotating body 560, the left rotating plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the left rotating plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the right rotating lid portion 570). ), but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the drive motor 541 and the rotating portion may be configured to contact the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is supported by the right fixing bush 522, and the driven plate 575 fixed to the rotating body 560 is supported by the attitude fixing bush 571, so that the electric wiring DK1 and the rotating body 560 are made of metal. Although the case where it is not directly supported by a member has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the electrical wiring DK1 and the rotor 560 may be directly supported by a metal member (eg, the U-shaped metal plate 511).

In the first embodiment, the case where the front cover member 762 is formed of an annular member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ring may be formed from a C-shaped member that is divided in the middle.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front lid member 762 is fastened and fixed to the displaceable base member 720 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, displacement base member 720 may be rotatably journalled. In this case, the rotation of the front lid member 762 allows the front lid member 762 to follow the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the attitude of the supported means 760 is changed and the attitude of the displaceable base member 720, which is vertically displaced, is not changed. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the displaceable base member 720 and the supported means 760 may be integrated so that both the displacement base member 720 and the supported means 760 can change their attitudes.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the attitudes of the supported means 760 on both the left and right sides change, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the attitude of the left supported means 760L through which the electrical wiring DK2 is guided may change, while the attitude of the right supported means 760R may not change. Even in this case, the tensile load applied to the electric wiring DK2 can be reduced.

In this case, a driving device may be provided to generate a driving force for changing the attitude of the supported means 760R. Thus, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes depending on whether the attitude of the supported means 760R changes as the displaceable base member 720 moves up and down, and when the attitude of the supported means 760R is maintained.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the supported means 760 changes its attitude with respect to the displaceable base member 720 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a slide member that is relatively slidably displaced in a direction opposite to the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 720 may be connected to the displacement base member 720, and the electrical wiring DK2 may be connected to the slide member. Even in this case, compared to the case where the electric wiring DK2 is connected to the displacement base member 720, the amount of displacement of the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2 when the displacement base member 720 is vertically displaced by the same distance is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is guided through the opening 714a arranged on the left side of the fixed base member 701 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 passing through the left opening 714a may be connected to the left supported means 760L, and the electrical wiring passing through the right opening 714a may be connected to the right supported means 760R. . In this case, electricity can be supplied to the right supported means 760R without going through the effect means 780.

Further, since the guide portion 765 is also formed in the right supported means 760R, the structures of the supported means 760L and 760R can be designed symmetrically in terms of function. In addition, when electric wiring is not passed through the opening 714a on the right side, the formation of the opening 714a on the right side may be omitted. Thereby, the rigidity of the right tubular projecting portion 714 can be enhanced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the supported means 760 is supported at the ends in the longitudinal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be supported near the central portion instead of the end portion, or may be supported at another portion.

In the first embodiment described above, the electrical wirings DK1, DK2, and DK3 are configured by one or a plurality of harnesses having a plurality of electric wires, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may consist of one or more flat cables. In this case, by aligning the direction in which the electric wires DK1, DK2, and DK3 can be displaced with the direction in which the flat cable is thin (thickness direction), it is possible to reduce the burden on the flat cable when it is displaced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where one detected portion 745a is formed on the terminal gear 745 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detected portions 745a may be formed at a plurality of locations (a plurality of angular positions can be detected). As a result, for example, different stop positions, ie, a drive stop position when controlling to raise the rotating arm member 743 to the end position and a drive stop position when controlling to reciprocate up and down using its own weight are detected. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first operating unit 400 is configured to stand by at the lower position and move upward, and the second operating unit 700 is configured to stand by at the upper position and move downward. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of each unit may be inverted upside down, or may be displaced sideways.

Although the case where the shape of the spring cover SC1 is fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring cover SC1 may be formed in a bellows shape and configured to be vertically displaceable. In this case, by connecting the lower end of the spring cover SC1 to the upper end of the effect means 780, the spring cover SC1 can be vertically expanded and contracted while the coil spring SP1 is hidden by the spring cover SC1. For example, by drawing a decorative pattern on the front surface of the spring cover SC1, it is possible to perform an effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes as the spring cover SC1 expands and contracts.

In the above-described second embodiment, a case has been described in which a dedicated solenoid 2086d for driving the decorative member 2086f is provided, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 2086f may be designed to contact the upper end of the effect means 780, and the decorative member 2086f may be displaced when a load is applied to the decorative member 2086f as the effect means 780 is displaced. good. In this case, the driving motor 731 is also used as a device for generating a driving force for displacing the decoration member 2086f, so that a dedicated driving device (corresponding to the solenoid 2086d) can be omitted.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the decorative member 2086f is rotationally displaced about the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base plate 60 may be configured to be slidably displaced along the surface direction of the front surface of the base plate 60 (up, down, left, and right), may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction, or be displaced by a combination of these. It may be configured as follows.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the assembly preparation position by releasing the connection with the rotating arm member 3743 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be arranged at the assembly preparation position by enlarging the elongated opening 723 or the transmission hole 744 .

In the third embodiment, the roller member 3729 abuts on the left and right extended portions SC3c to correct the posture change of the displaceable base member 3720. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be decelerated by contact between the roller member 3729 and the laterally extending portion SC3c. Also, a soft cushion member may be provided on the lower side of the left and right extended portions SC3c to soften the impact at the time of contact.

In the third embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is connected after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide concave portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the roller member 3729 may be engaged with the guide concave portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3 in a state where the connection of the electric wiring DK2 is completed.

In this case, the distance between the fixing shape portion 718 for fixing the electric wire DK2 and the path portion 765b becomes the longest, and there is a risk that an extra load is applied to the electric wire DK2. 5718 may be used. That is, by arranging the shape portion 5718 for fixing at the lowered position of the upper left and right end stoppers 5717 at the time of assembly, the distance between the fixing positions of the electrical wiring DK2 can be shortened.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described where the production means 780 is assembled after the small-diameter collar C3 is fastened (after the displacement base member 3720 and the rotating arm member 3748 are connected), but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, by configuring a member that connects the displacement base member 3720 and the rotating arm member 3748 so as to be assembled by screwing a fastening screw from the rear side, the displacement base member 3720 can be assembled after the production means 780 is assembled. and pivot arm member 3748 may be implemented.

In the above-described third embodiment, the guide concave portion SC3b is formed along the vertical direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wavy shape extending in the vertical direction. In this case, an effect of displacing the displacement base member 3720 in the left-right direction can be performed as the displacement base member 3720 is vertically displaced. In this case, it is preferable to omit the metal slide rail 711 .

The ball guide portion 4164b described in the fourth embodiment may be arranged upstream of the semi-formed portion 163a of the second flow path member 163 described in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball bridged from the first flow path member 162 to the second flow path member 163 from staying.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the shape portion for fixing 5718 moves up and down in conjunction with the upper left and right end stoppers 5717, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape portion for fixing 5718 may be vertically displaced alone. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need to take countermeasures against the positional deviation of the upper left and right end stoppers 5717 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the shaped fixing portion 5718 is controlled to be displaced upward after the path portion 765b passes through the left and right positions of the shaped fixing portion 5718. However, this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the fixing shape portion 5718 may be controlled to be displaced upward at the timing when the degree of loosening of the electric wiring DK2 is maximized (timing when the path portions 765b are arranged at the left and right positions of the fixing shape portion 5718). . In this case, an upward load can be applied to the electric wiring DK2 from an early stage, so that an upward load can be gently applied to the electric wiring DK2.

In the fifth embodiment, the fixing shape portion 5718 is upwardly displaced by the driving force of the solenoid SOL51, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving force (the driving force of the driving motor 731) transmitted via transmission means such as a gear interlocking with the displacement of another member (for example, the rotating arm member 743) that is displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731 It may be configured to be displaced.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the timing of vertically displacing the fixing shape portion 5718 is controlled to match the timing at which the load applied to the electrical wiring DK2 tends to be excessive. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the solenoid SOL51 may be configured to always operate in accordance with the drive period of the drive motor 731 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Technical concept to reduce displacement of electric wiring due to displacement of movable accessories>
In a game machine comprising displacement means configured to be displaceable and electric wiring connected to the displacement means, a section displaced by the displacement means includes a section displaced so as to reduce a load applied to the electric wiring. A gaming machine A1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the electrical wiring guided by the displacement means is arranged along the auxiliary means connected to the displacement means and configured to be displaceable, thereby placing an excessive burden on the electric wiring when the displacement means is displaced. There is a game machine that is configured to suppress the occurrence of a problem (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine requires auxiliary means that are not visible to the player, and thus has the problem of increasing the number of members arranged in areas that the player cannot see.

In addition, if the auxiliary means is damaged, the load on the electric wiring cannot be suppressed, so it is necessary to ensure the strength of the auxiliary means, and there is a problem that the product cost tends to increase accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement means displaces the electric wiring so as to reduce the load applied to the electric wiring, thereby reducing the amount of displacement of the electric wiring itself, or suppressing excessive displacement of the electric wiring. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate auxiliary means while preventing the exposure of

A specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, a binding band that can temporarily fasten the electric wiring may be used, or a silicon resin cover or tube surrounding the electric wiring may be used.

Moreover, the manner of reducing the load on the electrical wiring is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to reduce the displacement of (at least part of) the electrical wiring, or to increase the displacement of (at least part of) the electrical wiring.

In the game machine A1, the electric wiring is positioned at a predetermined portion outside the displacement means, the displacement means includes a guide portion through which the electric wiring is guided, and the distance between the guide portion and the predetermined portion is A game machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be displaceable so as to reduce the change in .

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the degree of freedom of the displacement mode of the displacement means can be improved compared to the case where the entire displacement means is displaced so as to reduce the displacement of the electrical wiring. .

The gaming machine A1 or A2 comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means toward the displacement means, wherein the electric wiring is connected to the displacement means. A game machine A3 is arranged on the opposite side of the transmission means as a reference.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the electric wiring is not arranged between the displacement means and the transmission means, and the transmission means does not need to have a structure for holding the electric wiring. Accordingly, the space between the displacement means and the transmission means can be narrowed, and the space on the front side of the displacement means can be secured.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means can be increased, so that the displacement means can be effectively used not only for hiding wires with low design and flatness but also for hiding wires with a three-dimensional design and high production effect. can be done.

In the gaming machine A3, intermediate means displaceably supported by the transmission means is provided, the intermediate means displaceably supports the displacement means, and the displacement of the displacement means is at least in the direction of displacement of the intermediate means. A game machine A4 characterized by including a displacement of a mode toward the opposite side of.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, if it is configured such that the electrical wiring is hidden on one side of the displacement means and supported by the intermediate means on the other side of the displacement means, the intermediate means can be arranged depending on the design. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the amount of displacement of the means. In other words, the amount of displacement when the intermediate means is displaced away from the electrical wiring can be offset by the displacement of the displacing means.

A game machine A5 in the game machine A4, characterized in that the transmission means comprises sudden stop means for suddenly stopping the intermediate means after the high-speed displacement.

According to the game machine A5, since the intermediate means can be stopped suddenly, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the intermediate means can be caused by utilizing the inertia of the displacement means.

In addition, even when the intermediate means is suddenly stopped, the reaction force of the displacement means prevents the electric wiring from flowing by inertia in the direction in which the intermediate means was displaced before the sudden stop of the intermediate means. It can be suppressed by (fishing). This can reduce the displacement of the electrical wiring.

A gaming machine A6 in gaming machines A4 or A5, wherein the electric wiring is guided to the displacement means on the side where the transmission means is arranged with reference to the displacement direction of the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the electric wiring can be guided to the displacement means on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force with reference to the displacement direction of the intermediate means. Even if is displaced in an unexpected displacement mode (even if it malfunctions), the amount of displacement of the electrical wiring can be easily suppressed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the displacement means includes a guide portion through which the electric wiring is guided, a base member having the guide portion, and a substrate disposed on the base member, The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the portion is arranged so as not to hide the board when viewed from the first direction.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring guided to the guide part from interfering with the presentation effect of the board.

<Technical Concept of Arranging the Motor Inside the Rotating Means>
A game machine comprising rotating means configured to be rotatable about a predetermined axis and driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the rotating means, wherein a detecting means configured to detect the position of the rotating means is provided. A gaming machine B1, wherein the detecting means is arranged inside the rotating means when viewed from the first direction.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine composed of a plurality of rotating means and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-130261). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although a slight space saving is achieved by rotating a plurality of rotating means with a driving force generated from a single driving means, the outer edge of the rotating means in the front view is larger than the outer edge of the rotating means in front view. Since the driving means and the detecting means are arranged on the outside, a separate shielding part is required to shield them, and there is a problem that the device provided with the rotating means becomes large in size when viewed from the first direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the detection means is arranged inside the rotation means when viewed from the first direction, the detection means can be hidden by the rotation means, so that only the detection means is shielded. A separate shield can be dispensed with and the size of the device can be reduced.

In addition, since detection means corresponding to each rotation means can be provided while avoiding an increase in size when viewed in the first direction, the degree of freedom in rendering can be improved.

Furthermore, since the detection means is provided inside the rotation means when viewed from the first direction, the degree of freedom in performing effects by rotating and stopping the rotation means can be improved while the device is kept small. .

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a supporting means for rotatably supporting the rotating means is provided, and the supporting means supports the driving means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, it is possible to reduce the number of members by using the supporting means for supporting the rotating means also for supporting the driving means.

A gaming machine B3, wherein the driving means is accommodated inside the rotating means in the gaming machines B1 or B2.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to save the space outside the rotating means.

A game machine B4 in any one of the game machines B1 to B3, wherein the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting a change in the position of the rotation means in the rotation direction, and is arranged inside the rotation means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the visibility of the outside of the rotating means is improved compared to the case where the detecting means is arranged outside the rotating means. can do.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the detection means is arranged on the downstream side of the transmission path of the drive force of the drive means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, compared to the case where the detection means is arranged on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force, in the middle of the transmission path of the driving force When an abnormality occurs (for example, when the rotating means is ruptured and driving force is transmitted only to the upstream side), the detection means can easily detect the occurrence of the abnormality at an early stage.

In this case, if the detection means is arranged at the downstream end of the transmission path of the driving force, the abnormality can be detected early regardless of where the abnormality occurs in the transmission path. can.

It should be noted that the mode of abnormality is not limited at all. For example, a rotating body formed by joining split bodies may break in the middle and the transmission of driving force may be interrupted, or a gear may be damaged in a mechanism in which driving force is transmitted by gears or frictional force. A mode in which no friction is generated, or a mode in which the driving means as the upper end portion of the driving force transmission path fails may be used.

In game machine B4 or B5, the detection means includes a detection device having a detection portion and a detected portion whose displacement is detected by the detection portion of the detection device, and the rotation means rotates the detected portion. A gaming machine B6 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the detection device can be fixed, so that the electric wiring and the like connected to the detection device can be easily configured.

Further, by directly detecting the displacement of the rotating means, it is possible to reduce the detection error as compared with the case of indirect detection.

In the game machine B6, the detected portion includes a protruding portion protruding inward of the rotating means along the rotating direction of the rotating means and a dividing portion formed as a concave portion dividing the protruding portion. , wherein the projecting portion is longer than the dividing portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the degree of reinforcement of the rigidity of the rotating means by the projecting portion can be increased.

In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the electric wiring connected to the driving means and limiting means for limiting the arrangement of the electric wiring are provided, and the electric wiring is connected to the connecting portion connected to the driving means. , and a connecting portion connected to the connecting portion, wherein the limiting means is configured to prevent the connecting portion from coming into contact with the driving means or the rotating means.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the durability of the electric wiring can be improved by the limiting means. That is, by avoiding the contact between the driving means and the connecting portion of the electric wiring, it is possible to suppress the deterioration and disconnection of the electric wiring due to the heat generated by the driving means. By avoiding this, it is possible to suppress deterioration and disconnection of electrical wiring due to friction.

In any one of game machines B1 to B8, provided with supporting means for rotatably supporting said rotating means, and electrical wiring connected to said driving means, said supporting means comprising a metal first supporting member; and a second support member made of resin, wherein at least one of the rotating means and the electric wiring is supported by the first support member via the second support member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the rotating means or the electric wiring is supported while the first support member opposes and stably holds the weight of the rotating means and the driving means. It is possible to avoid early wear of the rotating means and early breakage of the electrical wiring, as compared with the case of being directly supported by the first support means.

A game machine B10 in the game machine B9, wherein the first support member is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the rotation axis of the rotating means.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, it is possible to perform a movable effect of displacing the rotation axis of the rotation means while stabilizing the rotation of the rotation means.

<Technical concept on the structure of odd-shaped wiring>
1. A gaming machine C1 comprising a wiring support means having an opening through which an electric wiring is inserted, wherein the game machine is characterized by comprising limiting means for restricting the movement of the electric wiring inserted through the opening.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that electrical wiring is inserted through a cylindrical member having an open portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the opening is formed in a size that allows the connector of the electrical wiring to be inserted, and the electrical wiring having a diameter smaller than the connector cannot be positioned within the opening. There was a problem that the electrical wiring position in the state may not be uniform for each product.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, by restricting the movement of the electric wiring by means such as dividing the opening into a plurality of sections by the restricting means, it is possible to easily determine the position of the electric wiring within the opening. Therefore, the positions of the electrical wiring can be made uniform.

In addition, there is no limitation as to the manner in which the positions of the electric wires are uniform. For example, the relative position with respect to a predetermined member may be within a predetermined standard for each product. It is also possible to adopt an aspect in which each is equivalent.

Also, the shape of the opening is not limited at all. For example, circular openings, a predetermined number of square openings (triangles or squares), or other complicated shapes (for example, a star shape) may be used.

In the gaming machine C1, the restricting means includes a plurality of overhanging portions projecting inward of the open portion, and is configured such that the electric wiring can be arranged between the plurality of overhanging portions. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the work of inserting the electrical wiring through the opening is facilitated compared to the case where the opening is divided into a plurality of partitions by providing a partition inside the opening. be able to.

In the game machine C2, the wiring support means includes a fixing portion fixed to the guide means for guiding the electric wires, and the fixing portion is arranged on the projecting portion. C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the projecting portion can also be used for fixing to the guide means. Thereby, when fixing the wiring support means to the guide means, it is possible to avoid sandwiching the electric wiring between the wiring support means and the guide means.

In addition, the mode of the guiding means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the guide means may be configured as a part of a plate-like member, or may be configured as a columnar member (columnar portion).

In game machine C3, game machine C4 is characterized in that the guide means is formed thick in the thickness direction of the wiring support means along the shape of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, since the guide means is formed thick along the shape of the projecting portion, the guide path of the electric wiring arranged between the projecting portions is It is possible to ensure high rigidity of the wiring support means while ensuring the same.

A game machine C5 in the game machine C3 or C4, wherein the guide means comprises a columnar portion extending in a columnar shape in the thickness direction of the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine C5, the degree of change in the form (for example, looseness) of the electrical wiring arranged between the guiding means and the wiring supporting means can be controlled by loosely restricting the arrangement of the electrical wiring by the columnar portion. It can be gradual (gradual).

A game machine C6 according to any one of the game machines C2 to C5, wherein the wiring support means has a thickness forming portion formed to be thick toward the outer periphery from a portion where the projecting portion is not provided. .

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, even if the electric wiring is concentrated in a place where the projecting part is not arranged, the thickness forming part is reinforced. By fulfilling its role, it is possible to prevent the wiring support means from being cracked or damaged.

Further, when the wiring support means is supported by a harder member (for example, a metal member) from the outer peripheral side, the thick portion can be deformed more greatly than other portions (thin portions). Therefore, by arranging the thick-thickness forming portion at a location where the electrical wiring is concentrated, it is possible to easily avoid disconnection of the electrical wiring.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the wiring support means comprises first wiring support means and second wiring support means stacked on the first wiring support means. The game machine C7 is characterized in that the shape of the first open portion, which is the open portion, and the shape of the second open portion, which is the open portion of the second wiring support means, are different.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the state of the electric wiring in the first opening (for example, the degree of looseness) and the state of the electric wiring in the second opening are changed. By making them different, the mode of the electrical wiring can be changed stepwise.

Thereby, it is possible to easily cope with the switching of the mode required for the electric wiring. For example, when switching between a mode in which a predetermined stable displacement (displacement within a limited range) is required for the electrical wiring and a mode in which no displacement is required but positional stability in a state of being uniformly dispersed is required. In addition, the electrical wiring mode can be changed in stages.

In any one of game machines C1 to C7, game machine C8 is characterized in that the wiring support means includes a recessed portion wider than the width of the electric wire constituting the electrical wiring.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to set a limit to the extent to which the electric wires are separated, so that the electric wiring is prevented from interfering with other structures. , and the arrangement of electrical wiring can be facilitated.

<Technical concept for suitably running electric wiring along the guide route>
A game machine D1, comprising a configuration means for configuring a guide route capable of guiding an electric wire, wherein the configuration means is configured to be able to arrange the electric wire on the guide route.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing an electric wiring to a displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the electric wiring can be made to run along the displacement member, when the electric wiring is composed of a plurality of electric wires, it does not refer to the arrangement of the electric wires. There is a problem that there is room for improvement when applied to actual use conditions.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the configuration means for configuring the guide route of the electrical wiring is configured to be able to arrange the electrical wiring appropriately, so that the quality of the electrical wiring can be maintained in a high state.

In addition, there is no limitation on the mode of suitably arranging the electric wiring. For example, by bundling a plurality of electric wires in advance before the guide route becomes narrower, or by separating a plurality of electric wires in advance before the opening of the guide route becomes thinner, the electric wiring can be routed from the guide route. Alternatively, the electric wiring may be fixed to the guide route in a predetermined section. In the former case, disconnection of the electrical wiring can be easily prevented, and in the latter case, it is possible to easily identify the location of the disconnection of the electrical wiring, thereby facilitating handling of the disconnection.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the guide path includes a reduced portion whose width is locally reduced in a predetermined direction and has a plurality of cross-sectional shapes.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, by providing a reduced portion as a location where the load applied to the electrical wiring is relatively large, it is easy to predict the disconnection location when the electrical wiring is disconnected. Become. As a result, the time required for maintenance of the electrical wiring can be shortened.

In the gaming machine D2, the electric wiring arranged in the reduced portion is configured to have a reduced width when viewed in the first direction, and the configuration means includes the electric wire at a portion that guides the electric wiring to the reduced portion. A gaming machine D3 comprising wiring adjusting means configured to be able to shorten the width of the wiring as viewed in the first direction.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, by shortening the width of the electric wiring in the first direction view, it is possible to avoid the structure of other characters being restricted by the electric wiring. can. Furthermore, when the width of the electrical wiring is forcibly shortened, an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring, and there is a risk that the electrical wiring may be crushed or disconnected at an early stage. By adjusting the state of the electrical wiring by the wiring adjustment means before the wiring is installed, the load applied to the electrical wiring can be reduced. This can reduce the frequency of maintenance.

In the gaming machine D3, the wiring adjustment means has a curved surface with a center of curvature radius arranged on the electric wiring side, and the circumferential direction of the curved surface is configured to follow the direction in which the electric wires are arranged. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, it is possible to equalize the loads applied to the plurality of electric wires. That is, compared to the case where the plane faces a plurality of electric wires, the load applied to the electric wires is the same regardless of whether the electric wires are arranged side by side, regardless of whether they are closer to the center or outer. can do.

A gaming machine D5 in the gaming machine D3 or D4, wherein the wiring adjusting means comprises a recessed portion wider than the width of the electric wire constituting the electrical wiring.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3 or D4, it is possible to set a limit to the extent that the electric wires are separated, so that it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from interfering with other structures. , the arrangement of electrical wiring can be facilitated.

A game machine D6 is characterized by comprising a fixing member (design member) for fixing the electrical wiring in any one of the game machines D1 to D5.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to prevent the wear of the electrical wiring by preventing the internal displacement of the electrical wiring. Disconnection of electrical wiring can be prevented without tools.

Note that the manner of fixing is not limited at all. For example, the constituent means and the electrical wiring may be fixed with a liquid member such as glue, or a tape coated with an adhesive member (adhesive tape, etc.) may be attached to the constituent members and the electrical wiring. A mode may also be used, or a mode in which displacement of the electrical wiring is prevented by a load generated when the electrical wiring is sandwiched between the constituent means and the fixing member.

The game machine D7 is characterized in that in the game machine D6, an opening is formed in the fixing member, and the electric wiring is accessible through the opening.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the arrangement of the electrical wiring can be adjusted through the opening from the opposite side of the electrical wiring to the fixing member. It is possible to make it easier to avoid arranging the wiring in the wrong position, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from being damaged during the work.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, the guide path includes a receiving section configured to receive the electrical wiring and an entrance section configured to enter the receiving section, and the electrical wiring A gaming machine D8 characterized by being supported by the entrance section.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the possibility of the electrical wiring being caught between the recessed portion and the entrance portion can be reduced.

<Technical concept for improving production effect by using blind spots>
A game characterized by comprising a predetermined area configured to be visible when viewed from a first direction and through which a game ball can pass, and predetermined means for changing a viewing mode of the predetermined area when viewed from the first direction. Machine E1.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes an overhanging arrangement portion that is arranged so as to overhang the front side of a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the projecting portion blocks the player's line of sight above the center of the game board in the vertical direction. There is a problem that the effect tends to be low.

That is, by drawing patterns and figures in the limited area of the game board, it is possible to create individuality for each game machine. If it is clear that even if a pattern or a figure is drawn, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or figure, drawing the pattern or figure in a place where there is a possibility that the pattern or the figure may be hidden by the overhang arrangement portion can be avoided. Therefore, as a result, the area on which patterns and figures can be drawn on the game board is further reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in decorating the game board is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the predetermined area is adopted not as a place where a figure or pattern is drawn, but as a passage of light, etc., and by making it a place where the visibility mode can be changed by a predetermined means As a result of making effective use of the area and increasing the degree of freedom in decorating the game board, the performance effect of the game board can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized by comprising a game board on the front side so that game balls can flow down, the game board comprising an opening formed so as to overlap with at least a part of the predetermined area. Game machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light emitted from the back side position of the game board to the front side toward the game board is directed to the front side through a part of the opening overlapping the predetermined area. can be irradiated to Therefore, since the vicinity of the predetermined area, which tends to give a dark impression, can be brightly illuminated with light, the performance effect of the vicinity of the predetermined area can be improved.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the predetermined means constitutes a rolling surface of a game ball.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the light and the game ball are superimposed and visually recognized, so that it is possible to easily determine the downflow of the game ball. As a result, compared to the case where the player first notices the shooting abnormality after visually confirming that the game ball has not reached the vicinity of the winning opening, the shooting abnormality of the game ball ( For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice that the shooting of game balls is delayed due to a failure of the shooting device or a clogged ball. This makes it easier to avoid problems in the game (for example, so-called "flats in the one- and two-kind machine").

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E3, the opening is configured so as to be linearly visible along the predetermined means.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, it is possible to maximize the effective use of the predetermined area and avoid forming an opening in a portion that is not hidden by the predetermined means.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the predetermined means includes a first predetermined means that rolls when the game ball flows down the left side of the game area, and a first predetermined means that rolls when the game ball flows down the right side of the game area. A gaming machine E5 characterized by comprising a second predetermined means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3 or E4, by controlling which predetermined region of the first predetermined means or the second predetermined means through which the light is made to be visually recognized, the ball is shot. can be notified.

A game machine E6 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E5, it is provided with a displacement member that displaces to the front side through the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it can be configured so that the player can easily discern the change in the predetermined area.

<Technical concept of informing the game efficiency by decelerating the game ball>
The game ball is configured to be able to abut thereon, and it comprises a flow-down means constituting a flow-down path of the abutting game ball, and the flow-down means is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the game area side. Game machine F1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which an inner rail member constitutes a rolling surface for game balls spilled from a general prize winning opening on the left side of the game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229686). . A game ball that has reached the inner rail member on the left side of the game area is a game ball that is determined to flow down to the out port (become a dead ball), and the amount of this game ball is the game being played. This is one of the effective data for improving the winning efficiency in the game area of the machine. Therefore, by making the player pay attention to the left side of the game area, it is possible to give the player a predetermined benefit. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to retain the game balls because the game balls flow down too smoothly, and it is difficult to attract attention to the game balls flowing down the left side of the game area. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, since the flowing-down means is provided with the projecting portion, it is possible to decelerate the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to keep the game ball in the left side of the game area, and to draw attention to the left side of the game area.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that the projecting portion is provided on the downstream side of a landing range with which the game ball abuts when it lands on the flow-down means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, it is possible to avoid the unstable bouncing of the game ball after the game ball lands on the flowing-down means, It is possible to avoid damage to the protruding portion due to the impact when colliding with.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the protruding portion has a repulsive force that pushes back the game ball approaching from the upstream side of the flowing means, and the game ball approaching from the downstream side of the flowing means is stronger. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it is constructed such that a repulsive force generated in a direction of pushing back is larger than that of the game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from stopping on the flow-down means, and the game ball can pass over the protruding portion to the flow-down means. can be prevented from rising along.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion and a second projecting portion provided upstream of the flow-down means with respect to the first projecting portion, The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the projecting form of the first projecting part is different from the projecting form of the second projecting part.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the degree of retention (deceleration) of the game ball at the first projecting portion and the retention (deceleration) of the game ball at the second projecting portion ( deceleration) can be of varying degrees.

In addition, as a protrusion aspect, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be the shape of the projecting portion, the projecting length or projecting width, or the projecting interval when a plurality of projecting portions are formed.

For example, when the projecting length is adopted as the projecting mode, if the projecting length of the second projecting portion is made longer than the projecting length of the first projecting portion, the fuel flows down on the flow-down means. It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to clump together. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from congealing (collectively) flowing into the out port, thereby preventing ball clogging from occurring in the out port.

Conversely, if the projecting length of the second projecting portion is made shorter than the projecting length of the first projecting portion, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls flowing down on the flow-down means to clump together. As a result, when the game balls reach the flow-down means at a high frequency, the game balls can be easily clumped, so that it is possible to easily attract the attention of the player who wants to obtain information on the winning efficiency. .

The game machine F5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the flow-down means comprises a diffusing portion formed with a diffusing shape on the front side end portion.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the front side end of the flow-down means can be surface-illuminated.

In the game machine F5, the projecting portion has a thickness equal to that of the flow-down means, and the diffusion portion projects from the front end of the projecting portion in the direction opposite to the projection. A gaming machine F6 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, since the thickness of the protruding portion and the thickness of the flow-down means are the same, the molding accuracy when molding the flow-down means with resin can be improved for each part. It can be improved compared to the case where the thickness changes. In addition, since the diffusing portion has the protruding portion, it is possible to ensure a large area in which the light is diffused on the front side of the protruding portion, so that it is possible to improve the attention to the protruding portion.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a ball entrance is provided above the projecting portion so that a game ball can be entered, and the aspect in which the game ball is visually recognized through the projecting portion is the front side. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being configured to be changeable depending on whether or not a game ball enters a ball entry hole.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F6, it is possible to make the ball entering the ball entrance be grasped by visually recognizing the flowing-down means. As a result, attention to the flow-down means can be increased.

In the gaming machine F7, there is provided reflecting means arranged between the projecting portion and the ball entrance, and the reflecting means reflects at least part of the light reflected from the projecting portion to the entrance ball. A gaming machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to enter into a mouth.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the ball entrance can be reflected on the projecting part, so that the player who pays attention to the projecting part can see the ball entering the ball entrance. It is possible to grasp the presence or absence.

In addition, for the player who pays attention to the protruding portion, the action of the game ball (actually existing game ball) rolling on the upper part of the flow-down means and the game ball entering the ball entrance, which is the action of the reflecting means Since the game balls (the reflected game balls) can be visually recognized together, the player can feel as if many game balls are gathered in one place.

<Constructing one side of the flow path configured by connecting members together with one member>
In a gaming machine provided with structural members arranged opposite to a flow-down area configured to allow game balls to flow down, a first structural member constituting one side surface of the first flow-down area and constituting the other side surface of the first flow-down area A game machine G1 comprising a second component member and a third component member, wherein the third component member constitutes a part of the second flow-down region formed by the first component member.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a long flow path is formed by continuously arranging a plurality of pairs of flow path forming members that constitute the flow path (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159997 (see publication). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the number of members constituting the flow path is increased, making the management of the parts difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second component and the first component that constitutes the flow channel can be used as the third component and the member that constitutes the flow channel. Since the number of members can be reduced, parts management can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine G1, the one component constituting at least a part of the one side surface of the flow-down area includes an arrangement portion, and the other construction that constitutes at least a part of the other side surface of the flow-down area. The game machine G2 is characterized in that the member includes a positioning portion that is positioned by coming into contact with the arrangement portion.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, since the constituent members can be aligned by the contact between the arrangement portion and the positioning portion, many fastening and fixing portions are provided for alignment. Arrangement can be made unnecessary.

A gaming machine G3, which is the gaming machine G1 or G2, further comprising adjusting means for adjusting the arrangement of the second constituent member or the third constituent member with respect to the first constituent member.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the second component or the third component can be easily arranged with respect to the first component.

The adjusting means may be formed integrally with the second component or the third component, or may be configured as a separate member different from any of the first component, the second component, or the third component. can be

In the game machine G3, the game machine G4 is characterized in that the adjustment means is configured to be displaceable independently of any one of the first component, the second component and the third component.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of adjustment of the adjustment means.

In the game machine G4, the game machine G5 is characterized in that the adjustment means is configured so as not to affect the shape of the flow-down area even if the arrangement changes.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, only the first component, the second component and the third component are required to be arranged while confirming that the ball can flow down. , the arrangement of the adjusting means can be set independently of the possibility of the ball falling, so that the number of assembling man-hours can be reduced.

In the game machine G5, the first structural member includes a positioning concave portion recessed from the flow-down area side, and the adjusting means is disposed in the positioning concave portion, and the first component A gaming machine G6 characterized in that a surface on the side of the flow-down region is formed on a surface on which the one side surface of the member is formed.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, it is possible to prevent the shape of the flow-down region from changing due to the arrangement of the adjustment means being different while configuring one side of the flow-down region with the adjustment means. can.

In the game machine G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the adjustment means has a chamfered corner on the side facing the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machine G6, the surface of the adjusting means facing the flowing direction of the game ball is chamfered. Even if it protrudes from the side surface to the downstream area side, the collision point with the game ball can be constituted by the surface. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of damage to the adjustment means due to collision with the game ball, and to reduce the flow-down resistance of the game ball.

A gaming machine G8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the second component and the third component are connected.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G7, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the third component with respect to the second component. A portion connected to the third component member can be configured smoothly.

<Technical concept of arranging the spring near the center of the displacement member>
A game machine comprising displacement means configured to be displaceable, guide means configured to be capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means, and biasing means for biasing the displacement means, wherein and shielding means arranged to block at least part of a line of sight to the biasing means, the biasing means being positioned between the displacement means and the guide means along a predetermined direction. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable accessory that can be displaced, a guide rail that guides the displacement of the movable accessory, and an urging means that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the movable accessory. There is a gaming machine in which the urging means is arranged on the opposite side (rear side) of the movable accessory with the guide rail interposed therebetween (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-054856). However, in the conventional game machine described above, there is a long distance between the position of the center of gravity of the movable accessory and the position where the biasing force is generated, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently generating the biasing force. rice field.

On the other hand, if the biasing means is moved to the front side in order to bring the biasing means closer to the position of the center of gravity of the movable accessory, the player may see the biasing means, which may reduce the performance effect. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, it is possible to efficiently generate the biasing force by bringing the biasing means closer to the displacement means, and the shielding means prevents the biasing means from being visually recognized by the player. can do.

A game machine H2 characterized in that, in the game machine H1, the shielding means is arranged on the back side of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being hidden by the shielding means.

A gaming machine H3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the shielding means is constructed so as to be able to enter inside the displacement means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the shielding means can prevent figures and patterns drawn outside the displacement means from becoming invisible.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the shielding means includes correcting means configured to be contactable when the displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position, and the correcting means contacts the displacement means. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means can be corrected to the initial attitude side by doing so.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, even if the displacement means unexpectedly changes its posture, the displacement means can be shielded when placed at a predetermined position. Since the correcting means of the means contacts the displacement means and corrects the posture change, the posture change can be corrected each time the displacement means is placed at a predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacing means from changing its posture beyond the allowable limit and colliding with the part of the shielding means other than the correcting means.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the correcting means comprises a support stabilizing portion for stabilizing the support of the urging means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the correcting means can also be used as a means for preventing the urging means from coming off. As a result, the number of members can be reduced and functions can be consolidated.

A gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming machine H6 is characterized by comprising a second shielding means for shielding the shielding means from a specific direction view (looking up).

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, even when the displacement means is arranged at a position where the rear side of the displacement means can be visually recognized when viewed from the specific direction, The second shielding means can prevent the shielding means from being visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the urging means from being seen when viewed from a specific direction.

A gaming machine H7, wherein the second shielding means is arranged in the displacement means in the gaming machine H6.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6, it is possible to facilitate the appropriate concealment of the shielding means and the urging means corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
There is a gaming machine in which an inner rail member constitutes a rolling surface for a game ball dropped from a general prize winning opening on the left side of the game area (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-229686).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to draw the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the game area. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of attracting attention to a game ball flowing down a game area.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises a flow-down means configured so that a game ball can abut against it, and forming a flow-down path for the game ball in contact with the game ball. A protruding part protruding to the side is provided.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the protruding part is provided downstream of the landing range with which the game ball abuts when it lands on the flowing-down means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the protruding part has a repulsive force generated in a pushing back direction against a game ball approaching from the upstream side of the flowing-down means. In comparison, the repulsive force generated in the pushing back direction against the game ball approaching from the downstream side of the flowing-down means is configured to be larger.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, attention can be drawn to the game balls flowing down the game area.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion from being damaged.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the repulsive force can be changed according to the side with which the game ball abuts.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 60 base plate (game board)
60a window (opening)
63 General winning entrance (part of ball entrance)
86, 2086 center frame (part of predetermined means)
86b1 Left boundary wall (first predetermined means)
86b2 Right boundary wall (second predetermined means)
150 left effect unit (a part of the flow-down means)
153 Opposing plate (part of reflecting means)
155 projecting portion (part of projecting portion)
156 first projecting portion (second projecting portion)
157 Second projecting portion (first projecting portion)
158 diffusion part 161 base member (a part of the first component)
161e recess (positioning recess)
162 first channel member (part of second component)
163 second channel member (a part of the third component)
165 adjustment member (part of adjustment means)
410 support means (part of guide means, second wiring support means)
413 deformed hole (second opening)
460 Wiring Auxiliary Means (Part of Constituent Means, Part of Receiving Part)
463a functional curved surface (part of placement part)
510 fixing means (part of constituent means)
511 U-shaped metal plate (part of support means, first support means)
514 left and right fixed lid (part of fixed member)
514b extended frame (a part of the reduced part)
514e jig hole (opening)
516 guide member (part of wiring support means, first wiring support means, part of wiring adjustment means)
517 deformed hole (part of opening, first opening)
517a Fastening portion (part of restricting means, projecting portion)
517b Fan-shaped adjustment part (part of restriction means, concave part, part of wiring adjustment means)
519 Lower extension part (columnar part, part of the entrance part)
522 right fixing bush (part of support means, second support means, part of wiring adjustment means)
537 protruding fastening part (part of limiting means)
541 drive motor (driving means)
547 detection sensor (part of detection means, detection device)
560 rotating body (part of rotating means)
577 Detected part (protruding part)
711 metal slide rail (part of guide means)
718, 5718 Shaped portion for fixing (predetermined portion)
720, 3720 displacement base member (part of intermediate means, part of displacement means)
731 drive motor (driving means)
740 transmission means 744a curved portion (part of sudden stop means)
751 flanged tubular member (support stabilizing part)
760 supported means (part of displacement means)
763 driven displacement member (base member)
764 Decorative board (substrate)
765b path part (guide part)
788 lower shielding member (second shielding means)
2086e Displacement part (part of displacement member)
SP1 coil spring (part of biasing means)
SC1, SC3 spring cover (part of shielding means)
DK1, DK2, DK3 Electric wiring SC3c Left and right extensions (part of correction means)

Claims (1)

A plurality of configuration means having an opening configured to allow the electrical wiring to pass through at least a part of a guide path capable of guiding the electrical wiring ,
A plurality of projecting portions projecting from the plurality of constituent means toward the opening,
the electrical wiring is connected to moving means configured to be movable relative to the composing means;
The plurality of configuration means are each configured to be in contact with the electrical wiring,
The game machine, wherein the projecting portions are arranged with a space therebetween.

Images